Sunteți pe pagina 1din 161

DP-770(B)

SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in July 2016
3NVSM064
Rev.4
CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE


OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.

ATTENTION

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE


DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES
INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.

Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les
fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides
et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks
1 6 April 2011 Safety precautions, 1-3-45, 1-6-1, 2-1-2, 2-1-6, 2-4-4 -
2 4 June 2012 1-3-1, 1-3-2, 13-10 to 16, 1-3-18, 1-3-19, -
1-3-21 to 29, 1-3-32 to 39, 1-3-41 to 44, 1-4-3, 1-4-4,
2-4-1, Address
3 28 March 2014 Cover,Contents,1-2-2,1-3-2 to 1-3-56,1-4-1,1-4-3 to -
1-4-5,2-4-1,Installation guide, Address

Revision Date Pages Revised contents


4 27 July 2016 1-6-1 Correction: Procedures (DP main PWB is replaced with
a new one)
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.

CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols

The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.


1. Installation Precautions

WARNING

• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................

• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................

• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................

• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................

• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............

• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................

• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................

• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................

CAUTION

• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................

• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................

• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................

• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................

• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................

• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.

• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................

• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................

3. Miscellaneous

WARNING

• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................

• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
This page is intentionally left blank.
3NV

CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-2
1-1-3 Machine cross section ........................................................................................................... 1-1-3

1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment......................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking.............................................................................................................................. 1-2-2
(1) Unpacking......................................................................................................................... 1-2-2
(2) Remove the tapes and pad .............................................................................................. 1-2-3

1-3 Maintenance Mode


1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ......................................................................................... 1-3-1
(2) Maintenance mode item list.............................................................................................. 1-3-2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items .............................................................................. 1-3-3

1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection ..................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(1) Original misfeed indication ............................................................................................... 1-4-1
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions............................................................................... 1-4-1
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................................................................ 1-4-3
(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................... 1-4-3
(2) Self diagnostic codes........................................................................................................ 1-4-3
1-4-3 Electrical problems ................................................................................................................ 1-4-6
1-4-4 Mechanical problems............................................................................................................. 1-4-9

1-5 Assembly and Disassembly


1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly........................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Precautions....................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
1-5-2 Assembly and disassembly ................................................................................................... 1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley ..................... 1-5-2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley ............................................................. 1-5-5
1-5-3 Image adjustment .................................................................................................................. 1-5-6
(1) Adjusting the angle of leading edge ................................................................................. 1-5-6
(2) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge .................................................................................. 1-5-8

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement


1-6-1 Remarks on DP main PWB replacement............................................................................... 1-6-1

2-1 Mechanical Construction


2-1-1 Original feed section .............................................................................................................. 2-1-1
2-1-2 Original conveying section..................................................................................................... 2-1-3
2-1-3 Original switchback/eject sections ......................................................................................... 2-1-5
(1) Reverse duplex scanning operation ................................................................................. 2-1-7
3NV-3

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout


2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PWBs................................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors....................................................................................................... 2-2-2
(3) Motors............................................................................................................................... 2-2-3
(4) Others............................................................................................................................... 2-2-4

2-3 Operation of the PWBs


2-3-1 DP main PWB........................................................................................................................ 2-3-1

2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................ 2-4-1
(1) List of maintenance parts ................................................................................................. 2-4-1
(2) Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................... 2-4-2
(3) Wiring diagram ................................................................................................................. 2-4-4

INSTALLATION GUIDE
DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
3NV

1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications

Item Specifications
Original feed method Automatic feed
Supported original types Sheet originals
Maximum: A3/Ledger
Original sizes
Minimum : A5R/StatementR
Simplex: 45 to 160 g/m2
Original weights
Duplex : 50 to 120 g/m2
100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) or less
Loading capacity
Mixed original sizes (auto selection) 30sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Power source Electrically connected to the machine.
577 × 534 × 180 mm
Dimensions (W × D × H)
22 3/4 × 21 × 7 1/16”
Weight 14.5 kg/32 lb or less

NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.

1-1-1
3NV

1-1-2 Parts names

3
4

Figure 1-1-1

1. Original tray 5. DP top cover


2. Original width guides 6. DP switchback tray
3. Original eject table 7. Cleaning cloth compartment
4. Original stopper

1-1-2
3NV

1-1-3 Machine cross section

2 1

3 Original Path

Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section

1. Original feed section


2. Original conveying section
3. Original switchback/eject section

1-1-3
3NV

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-1-4
3NV

1-2 Installation

1-2-1 Installation environment


Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or
other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity; an abrupt
change in the environmental temperature; and cool or hot, direct air.
Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a well-ventilated location.

1-2-1
3NV-3

1-2-2 Unpacking
(1) Unpacking
19

16
20 21

7 9

17 18 8

11
12 24 10
23

22
1

13
14

15 5 6

Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking

1. Document processor 9. Rear top pad 17. Angle control fitting


2. Plastic sheet 10. Cleaning cloth 18. Fixing fittings
3. Inner frame 11. Plastic bag 19. Plastic bag
4. Outer case 12. Installation guide 20. Pin
5. Front bottom pad 13. Plastic bag 21. M4 x 14 TP screws
6. Rear bottom pad 14. Original mat 22. Plastic bag
7. Front left top pad 15. Original mat holder 23. DP cable cover 1
8. Front right top pad 16. Air-padded bag 24. DP cable cover 2
Caution: See the Installation Guide for installation.

1-2-2
3NV

(2) Remove the tapes and pad

Procedure
1. Remove four tapes. Tape

Tape

Tape
Tape

Figure 1-2-2

2. Open the DP top cover and original DP top cover


width guides.
Original width guide
3. Remove the pad.

Pad

Original width guide

Figure 1-2-3

1-2-3
3NV

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-2-4
3NV

1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-3-1 Maintenance mode


The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.

(1) Executing a maintenance item

Start

Enter “10871087” using


Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.

Enter the maintenance item


number using the cursor up/down keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop key.

Yes Repeat the same


maintenance item?

No

Yes
Run another maintenance
item?

No
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.

End

1-3-1
3NV-3

(2) Maintenance mode item list


Item
Section Content of maintenance item
No.
General U000 Output Maintenance Report
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
Optical U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
U072 Adjusting the DP center line
U073 Checking the scanner operation
U074 DP input response adjustment
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
U091 Setting the white line correction
U099 Adjusting original size detection
Operation U203 Checking DP operation
panel and U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors
support
equipment U244 Checking the DP switches

Mode setting U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication


Image U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
processing U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically
U425 Setting the target
Other U905 Checking counts by optional devices
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP

1-3-2
3NV-3

(3) Contents of maintenance mode items


Item No. Description
U000 Output Maintenance Report

Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call
occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB
memory.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the mainte-
nance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Output list
Maintenance List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
User Status Outputs the user status page
Service Status Outputs the service status page
Event Outputs the event log
Network Status Outputs the network status page
All Outputs the all reports

3. Press the start key. A list is output.


4. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed
location.
The output status is displayed.
Display Description
--- List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
Active Outputs the user status page
OK Outputs the service status page
Error Outputs the event log

1-3-3
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000 Method: Send to the USB memory
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the start key.
6. Select the item to be send.
7. Select [Text] or [HTML].
Display Output list
Print Outputs the report
USB (Text) Sends output data to the USB memory (text type)
USB (HTML) Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type)

8. Press the start key.


Output will be sent to the USB memory.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-4
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000 Event log

Event Log
MFP (2) 2013/01/31 08:40
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2013.01.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

(8) Paper Jam Log (12) Counter Log


# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time
16 9999999 0501.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:56
(f) J0000: 0 J0041: 1 (g) C0000: 0
J0001: 1 J0042: 1 C0001: 1
15 8888888 4002.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:54
J0002: 11 J0043: 1 C0002: 2
14 7777777 0501.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:52
J0003: 2 J0044: 1 C0003: 3
13 6666666 4002.01.08.01.01 2013/01/23 11:46
2013/01/23 11:36 J0004: 1 J0045: 1 C0004: 4
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/23 11:26 J0005: 1 J0046: 1 C0005: 5
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.01
2013/01/23 10:56 J0006: 1 J0047: 1 C0006: 6
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/21 11:56 J0007: 1 J0048: 1 C0007: 7
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.01
2013/01/21 10:56 J0008: 1 J0049: 1 C0008: 8
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/21 11:52 J0009: 1 J0050: 1 C0009: 9
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.01
2013/01/20 11:36 J0010: 1 C0010: 10
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/20 10:26 J0012: 9 C0011: 11
5
4 0501.01.08.01.01
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01 2013/01/13 14:16 J0013: 1 C0012: 12
(b) (c) (d) 2013/01/13 11:56 J0014: 1 C0013: 13
3 555555 (a) 4002.01.08.01.01 (e)
2013/01/11 16:26 J0015: 1 C0014: 14
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.01
2013/01/10 11:56 J0016: 1 C0015: 15
1 1 4002.01.08.01.01
J0017: 1 C0016: 16
J0018: 1 C0017: 17
(9) Service Call Log J0019: 1 C0018: 18
# Count. Service Code Date and Time J0020: 1 C0019: 19
8 1111111 01.6000 2013/01/23 11:52 J0021: 1 C0020: 20
7 999999 01.2100 2013/01/23 11:46 J0022: 1 C0021: 21
6 888888 01.4000 2013/01/23 11:36
J0023: 1 C0022: 22
5 777777 01.6000 2013/01/23 11:26
J0024: 1 C0023: 23
4 666666 01.2100 2013/01/23 10:56
2013/01/21 11:56
J0025: 1 (h) T00: 10
3 555555 01.4000 J0026: 1 T01: 20
2 444444 01.6000 2013/01/21 10:56
J0027: 1 T02: 30
1 1 01.2100 2013/01/21 11:52
J0028: 1 T03: 40
J0029: 1 T04: 50
(10) Maintenance Log J0030: 1 T05: 999
# Count. Item. Date and Time J0031: 1
J0032: 1
Log Data Nothing... J0033: 1
J0034: 1
J0035: 1
(11) Unknown toner Log
J0036: 1
# Count. Item. Date and Time
J0037: 1
5 1111111 01.00 2013/01/20 10:26
J0038: 1
4 999999 01.00 2013/01/13 14:16
J0039: 1
3 888888 01.00 2013/01/13 11:56
J0040: 1
2 777777 01.00 2013/01/11 16:26
1 666666 01.00 2013/01/10 11:56

(7) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

Figure 1-3-1

Detail of event log


No. Items Description
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine soft version
(4) Engine boot version

1-3-5
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000 Detail of event log
No. Items Description
(5) Controller BROM version
(6) Operation panel mask version
(7) Machine serial number
(8) Paper Jam # Count. Event Descriptions
Log The total page count Log code (hexadeci-
Remembers 1 to 16 of
occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the mal, 5 categories)
rence of the previous paper jam.
paper jam is less than (a) Cause of a paper
16, all of the paper jams jam
are logged. When the (b) Paper source
occurrence excesseds (c) Paper size
16, the oldest occur- (d) Paper type
rence is removed. (e) Paper eject
(a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
For details on the case of paper jam, refer to Paper Misfeed Detection.
(P.1-4-1)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck)
06: Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
07: Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
08 to 09: Reserved

(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)


00: (Not specified) 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Postcard B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Reply-paid post- 33: Folio
89: B5E card 34: Western type 2
0A: A3 21: Oficio II 35: Western type 4

1-3-6
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000
No. Items Description
(8) Paper Jam (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
cont. Log 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
01: Plain
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(e) Detail of paper eject location (Hexadecimal)
01: Face down (FD)
02: Face up (FU)/1000-sheet finisher face up (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FU)
03: 1000-sheet finisher face down (FD)
4000-sheet finisher main tray (FD)
05: Job separator tray
06: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FU)
07: 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FD)
09: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FD)
0A: Center-folding unit tray
0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU)
0F: 100-sheets Inner Job separator tray (FD)
15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD)
20: Mailbox tray 3 (FU)
29: Mailbox tray 4 (FD)
2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU)
33: Mailbox tray 5 (FD)
34: Mailbox tray 5 (FU)
3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU)
47: Mailbox tray 7 (FD)
48: Mailbox tray 7 (FU)
04/0D/0E: Reserved

Date and Time


Date and time of the occurrence of paper jam.

1-3-7
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000
No. Items Description
(9) Service Call # Count. Service Code
Log The total page Self diagnostic error code
Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of self count at the time of (See page 1-4-62)
diagnostics error. If the self diagnostics
the occurrence of error. 0X:YYYY
the previous diag- Where 0X is:
nostics error is less 01: Service Call/ System
than 8, all of the error has occurred
diagnostics errors 02: after Service Call has
are logged. occurred, power is turned
on and off, and disconnec-
tion has been executed

YYYY is a self-diagnostics
error code
Example: 01.6000

Date and Time


Date and time of occurrence of self-diag-
nostic error.
(10) Maintenance # Count. Item
Log
Remembers 1 to 8 The total page Code of maintenance
of occurrence of count at the time of replacing item
replacement. If the the replacement of (1 byte, 2 categories)
occurrence of the the toner container.
previous replace- First byte (Replacing item)
ment of toner con- 01: Toner container
tainer is less than 8, * :The toner Second byte
all of the occur- replacement log is (Type of replacing item)
rences of replace- triggered by toner 00: Black
ment are logged. empty. 01: Cyan
This record may 02: Magenta
contain such a ref- 03: Yellow
erence as the toner
container is First byte (Replacing item)
inserted twice or a 02: Maintenance kit
used toner con- Second byte
tainer is inserted. (Type of replacing item)
01: MK-XXXX
02: MK-YYYY
03: MK-ZZZZ

Date and Time


Date and time of replacement of the main-
tenance items.

1-3-8
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000
No. Items Description
(11) Unknown Toner # Count. Item
Log The total page count Unknown toner log
Remembers 1 to 5
of occurrence of at the time of the code
unknown toner toner empty error (1 byte, 2 categories)
detection. If the with using an
occurrence of the unknown toner con- First byte
previous unknown tainer. 01: Toner container
toner detection is (Fixed)
less than 5, all of Second byte
the unknown toner 00: Black
detection are 01: Cyan
logged. 02: Magenta
03: Yellow

Date and Time


Date and time of occurrence of toner con-
tainer replacement request display.
(12) Counter Log (f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic (h) Maintenance item
error replacing
Comprised of Indicates the log Indicates the log Indicates the log coun-
three log coun-
counter of paper counter of self diag- ter depending on the
ters including jams depending on nostics errors maintenance item for
paper jams, self location. depending on maintenance.
diagnostics cause. T: Toner container
errors, and
Refer to Paper Jam 00: Black
replacement of Log. Example: 01: Cyan
the toner con- C6000: 4 02: Magenta
tainer.
All instances includ- 03: Yellow
ing those are not Self diagnostics M: Maintenance kit
occurred are dis- error 6000 has hap- 00: MK-XXXX
played. pened four times. 01: MK-YYYY
02: MK-ZZZZ

Example:
T00: 1
The toner container has
been replaced once.
* :The toner replace-
ment log is triggered by
toner empty.
This record may con-
tain such a reference
as the toner container
is inserted twice or a
used toner container is
inserted.

1-3-9
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000 Service status page (1)

Service Status Page


MFP (2) 2012/10/27 12:00
(3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2012.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Controller Information (30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2


(31) Rings (Normal) 3
Memory status
(32) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(7) Total Size 3.5 GB
(33) Rings (TAD) 3
(34) Option DIMM Size 16 MB
Time
(8) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam
(9) Date and Time 27/10/2010 12:00 (35) FRPO Status
(10) Time Server 10.183.53.13 User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
Installed Options .
(11) Document Processor Installed .
(12) Paper feeder Cassette (500 x 2) .
(13) Side Feeder Cassette (3000) .
(14) Finisher 1000-Finisher .
(15) Job Separator Installed .
(16) Document Guaed (A) Installed .
(17) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed .
(18) Internet FAX Kit (A) Installed .
Security Kit (E) Installed .
(19) Data Security Kit (E) Software Type I .
(95) UG-33 Installed .
(20) UG-34 Installed .
(21) USB Keyboard Connected .
(22) USB Keyboard Type US-English .
(96) Scan extention kit(A) Installed .
Print Coverage .
(23) Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) .
(24) Total .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 .
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 .
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(25) Copy e-MPS error control Y6 0
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 RP Code
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44 (36) 1234 5678 9012
(26) Printer (37) 5678 9012 3456
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (38) 9012 3456 7890
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 (39) 3456 7890 1234
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(27) FAX
(28) K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
Period (27/10/2010 - 03/11/2010 08:40)
(29) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44

1 (6) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

Figure 1-3-2

1-3-10
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000 Service status page (2)

Service Status Page


MFP 2012/10/27 12:00

Firmware version 2N4_2000.000.000 2012.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Engine Information Send Information


(40) NVRAM Version _1F31225_1F31225 (44) Date and Time 10/10/27
(41) Scanner Version 2N4_1200.001.089 (45) Address
(42) FAX Slot1
FAX BOOT Version 5JT_5000.001.001
FAX APL Version 5JT_5100.001.001
FAX IPL Version 5JT_5200.001.001
(43) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D

1/2 (46) (47)


(48) 100/100
(49) 0/0/0/0
(50) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64)
(65) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(66) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
00000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000000000000000000000000000000000/000000/ (67) (68) (69)
(70) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(71) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(72) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(76) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(77) XXXXXXXX
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (78) (79)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (80) (81)
(82) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00
0/3/ (83) (84)
0/12.3/56.7/ (85) (86) (87)
1/1/1/0/1/0 2010/12/15 12:34:56 (88)
1/5/ (89)(90)
1/1/ (91)(92)
1/ (93)
ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ (94)

2 [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

Figure 1-3-3

1-3-11
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000 Detail of service status page
No. Description Supplement
(1) Firmware version -
(2) System date -
(3) Engine soft version -
(4) Engine boot version -
(5) Operation panel mask version -
(6) Machine serial number -
(7) Total memory size -
(8) Local time zone -
(9) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour:minute
(10) NTP server name -
(11) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not installed
document processor
(12) Presence or absence of the Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder/Not Installed
paper feeder
(13) Presence or absence of the side Side deck/Side multi tray/Side paper feeder/
feeder Side large capacity feeder/Not Installed
(14) Presence or absence of the 1000-sheet finisher/4000-sheet finisher/
finisher Not Installed
(15) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
job separator
(16) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
printed document guard kit
(17) Presence or absence of the IC Installed/Not Installed/Trial
card authentication kit
(18) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
internet fax kit
(19) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
data security kit
(20) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
UG-34
(21) Presence or absence of the Connected/Not connected
USB keyboard
(22) USB keyboard setting display US-English/US-English with Euro/German/French
(23) Page of relation to the A4/Letter * :Print Coverage provides a close-matching refer-
ence of toner consumption and will not match with
the actual toner consumption.
(24) Average coverage for total Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(25) Average coverage for copy Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

1-3-12
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000
No. Description Supplement
(26) Average coverage for printer Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(27) Average coverage for fax Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(28) Cleared date and output date -
(29) Coverage on the final output -
page
(30) Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(31) Number of rings 0 to 15
(32) Number of rings before auto- 0 to 15
matic switching
(33) Number of rings before connect- 0 to 15
ing to answering machine
(34) Optional DIMM size -
(35) FRPO setting -
(36) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
update.
(37) RP code Code the main software version and the date of
update.
(38) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
the previous update.
(39) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the
previous update.
(40) NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

(a) Consistency of the present software version


and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version
and the ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database ver-
sion
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and
(e) are identical with (c) and (f).
(41) Scanner firmware version -

1-3-13
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000
No. Description Supplement
(42) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(43) Mac address -
(44) The last sent date and time -
(45) Transmission address -
(46) Destination information -
(47) Area information -
(48) Margin settings Top margin/Left margin
(49) L settings L Top margin integer part/
L Top margin decimal part/
L Left margin integer part/
L Left margin decimal part/
(50) Life counter (The first line) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette 1/Cassette 2/
Cassette 3/Cassette 4/Cassette 5/Cassette 6/
Cassette 7/Duplex
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/
Transfer belt unit/Developer unit K/
Developer unit C/Developer unit M/
Developer unit Y/Maintenance kit A/
Maintenance kit B/Maintenance kit C
(51) Panel lock information 0: Off
1: Partial lock 2: Full lock
(52) USB information U00: Not installed/U01: Full speed/U02: Hi speed
(53) Paper handling information 0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit
(54) Color printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(55) Black and white printing double 0: All single counts
count mode 1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(56) Billing counting timing -
(57) Temperature (machine inside) -
(58) Temperature (machine outside) -
(59) Relative humidity -
(machine outside)
(60) Humidity (machine inside) -
(61) Fixed assets number -
(62) Job end judgment time-out time -

1-3-14
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000
No. Description Supplement
(63) Job end detection mode -
(64) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
(65) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
* : For details on settings, 1: Normal 1 1: Middle
refer to MDAT Command 2: Normal 2 2: Low
in “Prescribe Commands 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
Reference Manual. 4: Heavy 1 Duplex settings
5: Heavy 2 0: Disable
6: Heavy 3 1: Enable
7: Extra Heavy
(66) Calibration information Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(67) Calibration information -
(68) Calibration information -
(69) Calibration information -
(70) Calibration information -
(71) Calibration information -
(72) Calibration information -
(73) Calibration information -
(74) Calibration information -
(75) Calibration information -
(76) RFID information -
(77) RFID reader/writer version infor- -
mation
(78) Color table version for printer -
(79) Color table 2 version for printer -
(80) Color table version for copy -
(81) Color table 2 version for copy -
(82) Maintenance information -
(83) Altitude 0: Standard
1: High altitude 1
2: High altitude 2
(84) Charger roller correction 1 to 5
(85) Configuring toner coverage 0: Full-color count display
counters 1: Color coverage count display
(86) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(87) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0

1-3-15
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U000
No. Description Supplement
(88) Data Sanitization information -
(89) Toner low setting 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
(90) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(91) Limiting shifting for one-page 0: Invalid (No shift limit)
document 1: Valid (Shift limit)
(92) Setting confirmation display for 0: Not shown
banner printing 1: Shown on every page
(93) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)
1: Full-page mode
(94) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(95) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
UG-33
(96) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
Scan extension kit(A)

Code conversion

A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

Description
Exits the maintenance mode and return to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.

Method
1. Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.

1-3-16
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp

Description
Lights the exposure lamp.
Purpose
To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD The exposure lamp lights
CIS The CIS lights (when dual scan DP is installed)
3. Press the start key. The lamp lights.
4. To turn the lamp off, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-17
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP

Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Perform the test copy at the four scanning
positions after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.

Setting
1. Press the start key.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
DP Read Starting position adjustment for -38 to 38 0 0.158 mm
scanning originals
Black Line Scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals
2. Select [DP Read].
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to
the left when the setting value is decreased.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Select [Black Line].
6. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key.
9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-18
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U070 Adjusting the DP magnification

Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the
DP is used.
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction when the CIS
is used.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Sub Scan(F) Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
scanning direction of CCD
(first side)
Sub Scan(B)*1 Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
scanning direction of CCD
(second side)
Main Magnification in the main scan- -100 to 100 0 0.02 %
Scan(CIS)*2 ning direction of CIS
Sub Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
Scan(CIS)*2 scanning direction of CIS
*1: Reversed DP only. *2: Dual scan DP only.

Adjustment: [Sub Scan]


1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image
shorter.

Original Copy Copy


example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-4

2. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-19
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U070 Adjustment: [Main Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image.

Original Copy Copy


example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-5

2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the magnification, perform the following maintenance
modes.

U039 U070

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-20
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing

Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the origi-
nal and the copy image when the DP is used.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Reversed DP
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front Head Leading edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (first side)
Front Tail Trailing edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (first side)
Back Head Leading edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (second side)
Back Tail Trailing edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (second side)

Dual scan DP
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front Head Leading edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CCD (first side)
Front Tail Trailing edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CCD (first side)
CIS Head Leading edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CIS
CIS Tail Trailing edge registration of CIS -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm

1-3-21
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U071 Adjustment: Leading edge registration
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image
backward.

Original Copy Copy


example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-6

2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration, proceed with the follow-
ing maintenance modes.

U039 U034 U071

Adjustment: Trailing edge registration


1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-7

2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-22
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U072 Adjusting the DP center line

Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy
image when the DP is used.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front DP center line (first side) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
Back DP center line (second side) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
CIS* CIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085 mm
*: Dual scan DP only
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value moves the image rightward and decreasing it moves the image leftward.

Original Copy Copy


example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-8

7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line, proceed with the following mainte-
nance modes.

U034 U065 U067 U072

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-23
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U073 Checking the scanner operation

Description
Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check the scanner operation. This is also done to check the accumulation of dust on the slit
glass.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display Description
Scanner Motor Scanner operation
Home Position Home position operation
Dust Check Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on
DP Reading DP scanning position operation

Setting: [Scanner Motor]


1. Select [Scanner Motor].
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display Operating conditions Setting range Initial setting
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 % 100
Size Original size See below. 10200
Lamp On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on) 1

Original sizes for each setting in SIZE


Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
5000 A4 5000 A5R
4300 B5 7800 Folio
5100 11" x 8 1/2" 10200 11" x 17"
10000 A3 9000 11" x 15"
8600 B4 8400 8 1/2" x 14"
7100 A4R 6600 8 1/2" x 11"
6100 B5R 5100 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
7. To stop operation, press the stop key.

1-3-24
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U073 Method: [Home Position]
1. Select [Home Position].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position.

Method: [Dust Check]


1. Select [Dust Check].
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key.

Method: [DP Reading]


1. Select [DP Reading].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position.

Completion
Press the stop key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.

1-3-25
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U074 DP input response adjustment

Description
Sets the density correction for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original or a document
with a background that is slightly colored is scanned from the DP.
Perform adjustment if the page scanned using the table and the page scanned using DP do not
match.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Coefficient Compensating original document scan- 0 to 3 1
ning density
Settings 0: No correction / 1: Slight correction / 2: Medium correction / 3: Strong correction
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-26
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation

Description
The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing
edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust
is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Using image correction to reduce black streaks.
Purpose
When using DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to
original reading position.

Caution
The coordinates of position where documents are scanned are modified when [System Menu]
[Adjustment/Maintenance] [Correcting Black Line] is set to [Off].

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected.
Black Line Initialization of original reading position.

Setting: [CCD]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
* : Decreasing the setting makes the objects with less density recognized as dusts, less
dusts becomes detectable.
Increasing the value allows more dusts to be detected and the cleaning prompts to be dis-
played more often.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Method: [Black Line]


1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-27
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U091 Setting the white line correction

Description
Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of
abnormal pixels.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Calculation(R) Abnormal pixel count result for color R
Calculation(G) Abnormal pixel count result for color G
Calculation(B) Abnormal pixel count result for color B
Threshold(R) Abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color R
Threshold(G) Abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color G
Threshold(B) Abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color B
Threshold Abnormal pixel threshold value setting
(Abnormal)
Mode Switching between white line correction mode ON/OFF
Execute Holding of white reference data

Method: white line correction


1. Press [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Holding of white reference data is started.
3. The count result of abnormal pixels is displayed.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Place a gray original on the DP with the gray side down. Load paper in the cassette.
The paper should be the same size as the original.
6. Press the start key.
Two test pattern sheets will be printed.(1 st sheet: Approx. 60 mm black band, 2nd sheet:
Blank or approx. 60 mm gray band)
7. If vertical black lines appear on the blank (or gray band) page and vertical white lines appear
on the black band in the same position, clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then
repeat white line correction.
If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets, white line correction has
been completed normally. However, the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine, and thus
the engine must be checked.
8. Press the system menu key.
Mode is set to 1.

1-3-28
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U099 Adjusting original size detection

Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
Modify the threshold of detection if documents are frequently mal-detected in size after scanning
a wholly dark document or a document enclosed with dark objects on edges.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Data1 Displays the width of an Original Area colored original document
B/W Level1 Setting original size detection threshold value
Data2 Displays the width of an Original Area colored original document (when
DP is installed)

Method: [Data1/Data2]
1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP
2. The light source illuminates and the CCD sensor determines the width of the document. The
original size sensor determines the document is vertical or horizontal. (The document is
detected two times when the DP is installed.)
Display Description
Original Area R Detected original width size for color R
Original Area G Detected original width size for color G
Original Area B Detected original width size for color B
Original Area Detected original width size
Size SW L Displays the original size sensor (OSS) ON/OFF

1-3-29
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U099 Setting: [B/W Level1]
1. Select an item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting*
Original R1 Original threshold value for color R (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original R2 Original threshold value for color R (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original R3 Original threshold value for color R (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original G1 Original threshold value for color G (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original G2 Original threshold value for color G (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original G3 Original threshold value for color G (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original B1 Original threshold value for color B (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original B2 Original threshold value for color B (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original B3 Original threshold value for color B (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
*:DP is not installed/DP is installed
Reducing the value increases the sensitivity of the sensor allowing a document with more
density to be detected, however, the document mat could be detected as an original docu-
ment.
If the values vary excessively, mal-detection could occur depending on how a document is
placed.

Original mat Original


Fig. Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"

1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"

297 mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"

Figure 1-3-9

3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-30
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U203 Checking DP operation

Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
To check the DP operation.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the speed to be operated.
Display Description
Normal Speed Normal reading (600 dpi)
High Speed High-speed reading
Mode Sets the conveying timing verification mode
Reset Resets the conveying timing verification data
Result Resets the conveying timing verification data

4. Select the item to be operated.


Display Description
CCD ADP With paper, single-sided original of CCD
CCD RADP With paper, double-sided original of CCD
CIS With paper, double-sided original of CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, single-sided original of CCD
(continuous operation)
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, double-sided original of CCD
(continuous operation)
CIS (Non-P) Without paper, double-sided original of CIS
(continuous operation)
5. Press the start key. The operation starts.
6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key.

Setting: [Mode]
1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Sets the conveying timing verification mode on
Off Sets the conveying timing verification mode off

2. Press the start key.

Setting: [Reset]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key.

1-3-31
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U203 Setting: [Result]
Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors

Description
Turn the motors or solenoids in the DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Feed Motor DP original feed motor (DPOFM) is turned on
Conv Motor DP original conveying motor (DPOCM) is turned on
Rev Motor*1 DP switchback motor (DPSBM) is turned on
Lift Motor DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on
Rev Press Sol*1 DP pressure solenoid (DPPSOL) is turned on
Rev Branch Sol*1 DP feedshift solenoid (DPFSSOL) is turned on
Eject Motor*2 DP eject motor (DPEM) is turned on
Regist Motor*2 DP registration motor (DPRM) is turned on
DP Fan*2 DP fan motor 1 (DPFM1) is turned on
CIS Fan*2 DP fan motor 2 (DPFM2) is turned on
*1: Reversed DP only. *2: Dual scan DP only.
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.

1-3-32
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U244 Checking the DP switches

Description
Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP.
Purpose
To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
Feed DP feed sensor (DPFS)
Regist*1 DP registration sensor (DPRS)
Timing DP timing sensor (DPTS)
CIS Head*2 DP CIS sensor (DPCS)
Tray*1 DP switchback sensor (DPSBS)
Set DP original sensor (DPOS)
Longitudinal DP original length switch (DPOLSW)
Lift U-Limit DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1)
Lift L-Limit DP lift sensor 2 (DPLS2)
Cover Open DP interlock switch (DPILSW)
Open DP open/close switch (DPOCSW)
Eject DP eject sensor (DPES)
Slant*2 DP slant sensor (DPSS)
*1: Reversed DP only. *2: Dual scan DP only.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-33
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication

Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease
by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display Description
Black Line Mode Black line cleaning guidance ON/OFF setting
Black Line Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication

Setting: [Black Line Mode]


1. Select On or Off.
Display Description
On Displays the cleaning guidance
Off Not to display the cleaning guidance
Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Setting: [Black Line Cnt]


1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indi- 0 to 255 8
cation ( x 1000 sheets)
When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is
detected.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-34
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP

Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
A Margin DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
C Margin DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
A Margin DP left margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)*
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
(Back)* (second side)
C Margin DP right margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)*
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
(Back)* (second side)
* : Dual scan DP only

6. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.

DP leading edge margin


(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)

DP left margin DP right margin


(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

DP trailing edge margin


(4.0 mm or less)

Figure 1-3-10

7. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-35
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U404 Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance
modes.

U039 U034 U402 U403 U404

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-36
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP
scanning sections.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Perform adjustments using a new test chart (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB, LED lamp PWB,
ISU, CIS and/or DP main PWB.
* : To automatically adjust the DP, to avoid damaging original documents, using a Chart 2-2
test chart is recommended.Method
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Original to be used for adjustment
Display Description
P/N Chart image
Table (Chart1) Adjusting the scanner color and 7505000005 Chart 1
centering and timing for the leading
edge
DP FaceUp Adjusting color, centering, and
(Chart1) timing for the leading edge of the
reading unit (fore side) of the DP COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010

DP FaceDown Adjusting color and retrieval of the


(Chart1) target data of the reading unit (back
side) of the DP (CIS)
Table (Chart2) Adjusting the scanner color and 302FZ56990 Chart 2-1
centering and timing for the
leading edge

DP FaceUp Adjusting the scanner centering Chart 2-2


(Chart2) and timing for the leading edge 302AC68243
DP FaceDown Adjusting retrieval of the target
(Chart2) data of the reading unit (back side)
of the DP (CIS)

Adjusting color and retrieval of the 303JX57010 GAMMMA


target data of the reading unit
(back side) of the DP (CIS)

303JX57020 MATRIX

1-3-37
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411
Display Description Note
Target Set-up for obtaining the target Select Auto to automatically read and
value enter the target values using the Chart 1
test chart
Initial setting: U425
DP Auto Adj Automatic adjustment of auto- Execute this mode when the Chart 2-2
matic document processor using (302AC68243) is not available
the chart printed from the
machine

Method: [Table (Chart1)


To perform table adjustment using Chart1.

To automatically enter the target value


* : Select this option for normal use.

1. Set a Chart1 original (P/N: 7505000005) on


the platen.
2. Enter maintenance item U411. Chart1
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
5. Select [Table (Chart1)].
6. Select the item.
* : Select All for normal use. COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010

Figure 1-3-11

Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
LED/AGC Executing the adjustment for LED light quantity/AGC
White Executing the white reference compensation coefficient
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix

1-3-38
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411 7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-44).

* : If the target values are not obtainable automatically, manually enter the following target
values in the following manner and perform adjustment.
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the chart1 original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a chart1 original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart1)].
7. Select the item.
* : Select All for normal use.
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart1)]


To perform adjustment on the first side of the DP using Chart 1.
To automatically enter the target value.

1. Set a chart1 original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face up.


2. Enter maintenance item U411.
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
5. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
6. Select [Input].

Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment for input gamma and matrix
7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-44).

1-3-39
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411 * : If the target values are not obtainable automatically, manually enter the following target
values in the following manner and perform adjustment.
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the chart1original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the DP face up.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
7. Select [Input].
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart1)]


To perform adjustment on the second side of the DP using Chart 1.
To automatically enter the target value

1. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face down.


2. Enter maintenance item U411.
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
5. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
6. Select [All].

Display Description
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second
side) for magnification, leading edge timing, center line, MTF
filter, input gamma and matrix

7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.


* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-44).

* : If the target values are not obtainable automatically, manually enter the following target
values in the following manner and perform adjustment.
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the specified original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the DP face down.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

1-3-40
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411 Method: [Table (Chart2)]

1. Enter the target values which are shown on


the back of the Chart 2-1 original Chart2-1
(P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance
item U425.
2. Set a Chart 2-1original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart2)].
7. Select the item.
Figure 1-3-12

Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-44).

1-3-41
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411 Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart2)]

1. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) on the DP.


Cut the trailing edge of the original.
5mm
3/16”

149±1mm
5 7/8””

74±1mm
2 15/16”

Figure 1-3-13
2. Enter maintenance item U411.
3. Select [Target].
4. Select [U425] and press the start key.
5. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart2)].
6. Select [INPUT].
Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (first
side) for magnification, leading edge timing and center line

7. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.


* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-44).

Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart2)]

1. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the
platen, and press the start key.
2. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57020) on the platen,
and press the start key.
When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
3. Select the item.

1-3-42
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411
Original to be used
Display Description
for adjustment (P/N)
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243/
ning section (second side) for magnifica- 303JX57010/
tion, leading edge timing, center line, MTF 303JX57020
filter, input gamma and matrix
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 302AC68243
ning section (second side) for magnifica-
tion, leading edge timing and center line
MTF/Gamma Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 303JX57010
ning section (second side) for MTF filter
and input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- 303JX57020
ning section (second side) for matrix

[Input]
1. Select [Input].
2. Set a Chart 2-2 original (P/N: 302AC6824) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

[MTF/Gamma]
1. Select [MTF/Gamma].
2. Set a Gamma original (P/N: 303JX57010) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

[Matrix]
1. Select [Matrix].
2. Set a Matrix original (P/N: 303JX57020) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

When [ALL] is selected, the adjustment of [Input], [MTF/Gamma] and [Matrix] can be executed at
once. When adjusting, place the three specified originals on the DP face down, and then press
the start key.
Set the original 303JX57020, and then place 303JX57010 and 302AC68243 in order on the top
of the original.

* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem


occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning ( P.1-3-44).

1-3-43
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411 Method: [DP Auto Adj]
1. Load A4/ letter paper.
2. Press the start key to output the original for adjustment.
3. Set the output the original for adjustment and press the start key.
4. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face up.
5. Press the start key to scan documents.
6. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of first side starts.
7. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face down.
8. Press the start key to scan documents.
9. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of second side starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning.

Error Codes
Codes Description
01 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge
skew )
02 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction far end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction near end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge
skew)
04 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
05 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction far end)
06 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction near end)
07 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
08 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction far end)
09 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction near end)
0a Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
0b Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge origi-
nal check)
0c Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0d White band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0e DMA time out
0f Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error
10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge error
11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge error
12 DP uxiliary scanning direction skew error
13 Maintenance request error
14 Main scanning direction center line error

1-3-44
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U411 Error Codes
Codes Description
15 DP main scanning direction skew error
16 Main scanning direction magnification error
17 Service call error
18 DP paper misfeed error
19 PWB replacement error
1a Original error
1b Input gamma adjustment original error
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error
1e Lab value searching error
1f Lab value comparing error
63 Completed to obtain a test RAW

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-45
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425 Setting the target

Description
Enters the lab values that is indicated of the chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) or chart 2
(P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment.
Purpose
Perform data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the chart to be used.

Figure 1-3-14
Display Description Chart image
Chart1 Chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) Chart1

COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010

Chart2 Chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990) Chart2-1

Method: [Chart1]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.

Figure 1-3-15

1-3-46
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425
Display Description
White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment
Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment
Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment
Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
Setting: [White, Black, Gray1, Gray2, Gray3, C, M, Y, R, G, B]

1. Read the Lab values for


the items selected on
Chart 1.

Figure 1-3-16
Chart1
3. Enters the value that is indicated on the
face of the chart using the +/- keys or
numeric keys.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010

/ D E
Figure 1-3-17

1-3-47
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425
Display Description Setting range
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0

Setting: [Adjust Original]


* : This setting is usually unnecessary.
1. Press the start key. Adjust Original
Dist1 5.0

Dist2 10.0

Dist3 190.0

Figure 1-3-18

Display Description Setting range Initial Change in


setting value per step
Dist1 Measure the distance from the leading 4.0 to 6.0 5.0
edge to the top of black belt 1 of the
original
Dist2 Measure the distance from the left edge 9.0 to 11.0 10.0
to the right edge black belt 2 of the origi- 0.1mm
nal
Dist3 Measure the distance from the top edge 189.0 to 191.0 190.0
of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt
3 of the original

1-3-48
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425 2. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B
and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A
(30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3)
3. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist1].
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F
(15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1).
6. Enter the values using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist2].
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D and E.
1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2)
9. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist3].
10. Press the start key. The value is set.

30mm 148.5mm 267mm

A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge


15mm

Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge

[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2

COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010

Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)

Figure 1-3-19

1-3-49
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425 Method: [Chart2]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item. 2
CCD

DP

CIS

Figure 1-3-20

Display Description
CCD Entering the target values of the chart 2-1 (P/N: 302FZ56990)
used for adjustment
DP Entering the measurement value of the chart 2-2 (P/N:
302AC68243) used for adjustment
CIS Execution is not required

Method: [CCD]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
CCD
N875 B

N475 Adjust Original

Figure 1-3-21

1-3-50
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425
Display Description
N875 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment
N475 Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment
N125 Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions

Setting: [N875, N475, N125, C, M, Y, R, G, B]

1. Read the Lab values for the items


selected on the back of the Chart 2-1
test chart.

Figure 1-3-22

2. Enters the value that is indicated on the Chart2-1 Rear side


back of the chart using the +/- keys or
numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Figure 1-3-23

1-3-51
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425
Display Description Setting range
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0

Setting: [Adjust Original]


* : This setting is usually unnecessary.
1. Press the start key. Adjust Original
Lead 15.0

Main Scan 10.0

Sub Scan 190.0

Figure 1-3-24

Display Description Setting range Initial Change


setting in value
per step
Lead Measure the distance from the left edge to 14.0 to 16.0 15.0
the black belt (a) of the original
Main Scan Measure the distance from the leading edge 9.0 to 11.0 10.0
0.1mm
to the black belt (b) of the original
Sub Scan Measure the length from the edge of the 189.0 to 191.0 190.0
black belt (a) to edge of N475 of the original

1-3-52
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425 2. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B
and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A
(30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3)
3. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist1].
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F
(15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1).
6. Enter the values using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist2].
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D and E.
1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2)
9. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist3].
10. Press the start key. The value is set.

Leading edge
30 mm 148.5 mm 267 mm
Left edge
A B C

Black
35 mm belt (a)
D
Black Black
belt (b) belt (c)

110 mm G [Lead] =
E
((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2

[Main Scan] =
((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2

[Sub Scan] = G
185 mm
F

Original for adjustment (P/N: 302FZ56990)

Figure 1-3-25

1-3-53
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U425 Setting: [DP]
* : This setting is usually unnecessary.
1. Press the start key. DP
2. Enters the value that is indicated on the Lead 15.0

face of the chart using the +/- keys or Main Scan 15.0

numeric keys.
Sub Scan 390.0

Figure 1-3-26

Display Description Setting range Initial Change


setting in value
per step
Lead Measure the distance from the leading edge 14.0 to 16.0 15.0
to the black belt (inside) of the original
Main Scan Measure the distance from the left edge to 14.0 to 16.0 15.0
the black belt (inside) of the original 0.1mm
Sub Scan Measure the distance from the black belt of 388.0 to 392.0 390.0
leading edge (inside) to the black belt of
trailing edge (inside) of the original

3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Main Scan

Lead

Sub Scan

Original for adjustment Chart 2-2 (P/N: 302AC68243)


Figure 1-3-27
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-54
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U905 Checking counts by optional devices

Description
Displays the counts of DP, 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of DP, 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked.
The count of the selected device is displayed.
Display Description
DP Counts of DP
DF Counts of 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher

Method: [DP]
Display Description
ADP No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
RADP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
CIS No. of dual scan originals that has passed through the DP

Method: [DF]
Display Description
Sorter No. of copies that has passed
Staple Frequency the stapler has been activated
Punch Frequency the punch has been activated
Stack* Frequency the main tray eject has been activated
Saddle* Frequency the saddle eject has been activated
Fold* Frequency the center folding has been activated
Three Fold* Frequency the tri-folding has been activated
* : 4000-sheet finisher only

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-55
3NV-3

Item No. Description


U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP

Description
Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used.
Purpose
Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the
document processor is used.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
Front Deflection of single-sided original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
Back* Deflection of double-sided original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
Mix Deflection of mixed original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
*1: Reversed DP only.
* : The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the
deflection.
If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling
of original occurs, decrease the value.
7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-56
3NV-3

1-4 Troubleshooting

1-4-1 Original misfeed detection


(1) Original misfeed indication
When an original jams, the machine immediately stops operation and a message is shown on the machine
operation panel.
To remove the jammed original, open the DP top cover or switchback unit.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off
and on.

Jam code: Jam code suggesting the cause of jam


Position code: Code suggesting the place of jam

Paper jam.

JAM code JAM 0110

Position code 15, 18

08/13

Figure 1-4-1

(2) Original misfeed detection conditions

DPLS1
DPRS DPFS DPOS

DPLS2
DPSBS

DPES

DPTS

Figure 1-4-2

1-4-1
3NV

Code Contents Conditions


9000 No original feed DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn on within specified time
during the first sheet feeding (Retry 5 times).
9001 DP original conveying jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) turns off within the specified time since
the sensor turns on.
9002 DP sensor stay jam Sensor in the conveying system is on since original feeding
starts..
9004 DP switchback jam 2 DP registration sensor (DPRS) is not turned on within specified
time since original switchback operation starts.
9005 No original feed 2 DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within specified time of
lift board rises.
9006 DP switchback jam 3 DP eject sensor (DPES) is not turned on within specified time
since original switchback operation starts.
9007 DP switchback jam 4 DP eject sensor (DPES) is not turned off within specified time
since original switchback operation starts.
DP original conveying jam2 Next feed original became the stand-by states of paper feed
9009
while reading the image.
9010 Document processor open Document processor is opened during original feeding.

9011 DP top cover open The DP top cover is opened during original feeding.

9110 DP feed sensor stay jam DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn off within specified time of
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9200 DP registration sensor non DP registration sensor (DPRS) does not turn on within specified
arrival jam time of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning on.
9210 DP registration sensor stay DP registration sensor (DPRS) does not turn off within specified
jam time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9400 DP timing sensor non DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn on within specified time
arrival jam during original feeding (Retry 5 times).
9410 DP timing sensor stay jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn off within specified time
of DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning off.
9500 DP switchback sensor non DP switchback sensor (DPSBS) does not turn on within specified
arrival jam time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9600 DP eject sensor non arrival DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn on within specified time of
jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9610 DP eject sensor stay jam DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn off within specified time of
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning off.

1-4-2
3NV-3

1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the
problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back
on.

(2) Self diagnostic codes

Check procedures
Code Contents Causes
corrective measures
9000 Document processor communica- DP main PWB 1. Check that the versions of the main
tion error unit firmware and the DP firmware
Communication with the document are identical.
processor is not possible. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way
in.
DP main PWB(YC1) and ISC
PWB(YC12)
ISC PWB (YC3) and Main PWB
(YC11)
3. If the wiring is disconnected,
shorted or grounded, replace the
wiring.
4. Replace the DP main PWB
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB.

1-4-3
3NV-3

Check procedures
Code Contents Causes
corrective measures
9040 DP lift motor going up error DP lift motor 1. Execute U906 Separating
When the DP lift motor is driven, DP Operation Release .
lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check
1500 pulse. the DP motor operation (see page
(Three recovery times.) 1-3-32).
The above has been detected 5 3. Check that the original document lift
times.
guide can move upwards.
* : The number of detection
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
should be weighted with one
firmly connected and, if necessary,
for the rise at job start and
two for the irregular rise dur- connect the connector all the way
ing transpoting. The accumu- in.
lated number must be DP lift motor and DP MAIN PWB
cleared at completion of a (YC5)
normal rise. The default 5. If the wiring is disconnected,
threshold is 5. shorted or grounded, replace the
wiring.
6. Replace the DP lift motor.
DP lift sensor 1 1. Execute U244 LIFT L-Limit to check
DP switch (see page 1-3-33).
2. Check that the sensor and its
mounting bracket are correctly
positioned.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way
in.
DP lift sensor 1 and DP Main PWB
(YC4)
4. Replace the DP lift sensor 1.
DP Main PWB Replace the DP main PWB

1-4-4
3NV-3

Check procedures
Code Contents Causes
corrective measures
9050 DP lift motor going down error DP lift motor 1. Execute U906 Separating
When the DP lift motor is driven, DP Operation Release .
lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check
1500 pulse. the DP motor operation (see page
(Three recovery times.) 1-3-32).
The above has been detected 5 3. Check that the original document lift
times.
guide can move downwards.
4. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way
in.
DP lift motor and DP main PWB
(YC5)
If the wiring is disconnected,
shorted or grounded, replace the
wiring.
5. Replace the DP lift motor.
DP lift sensor 2 1. Execute U244 LIFT L-Limit to check
DP switch (see page 1-3-33).
2. Confirm that the DP lift sensor 2 has
been firmly fitted.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way
in.
DP lift sensor 2 and DP main PWB
(YC2)
4. Replace the DP lift sensor2.
9060 DP EEPROM error Defective DP Replace the DP main PWB and check
Mismatch of reading data from two main PWB. for correct operation.
locations occurs 3 times succes- Device damage Contact the Service Administrative Divi-
sively.
of EEPROM. sion.
Mismatch between writing data and
reading data occurs 3 times succes-
sively.
9070 Communication error between DP Defective con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for
and SHD nector cable or continuity within the connector cable. If
A communication error is detected. poor contact in none, replace the cable.
the connector. DPSHD PWB (YC1) and DP main PWB
(YC10)
Defective Replace the DPSHD PWB and check
DPSHD PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-5
3NV

1-4-3 Electrical problems


Troubleshooting to each failure must be made in the order of the numbered symptoms.

Problem Causes Check procedures / corrective measures


(1) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The LED lamp cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not turn on tact in the connector. DP original sensor and DP main PWB (YC4_A)
when an original is DP LED PWB and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
present on the DP.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the DP original sensor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP LED PWB or DP main PWB and check for
correct operation.

(2) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The size of the cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
original on the DP tact in the connector. DP original width switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
is not displayed DP original length switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
correctly. Replace the DP original width switch or DP original length
2. Defective switch.
switch.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

(3) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP feed motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. DP feed motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP feed motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

(4) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. DP conveying motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
operate.
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP conveying motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

1-4-6
3NV

Problem Causes Check procedures / corrective measures


(5) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP switchback cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. DP switchback motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
operate. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
2. Defective connector
cable or poor con- grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
tact in the connector. replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the DP switchback motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

(6) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP lift motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective connector Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
cable or poor con- grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
tact in the connector. replace if any.
3. Defective motor Replace the DP lift motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

(7) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP switchback cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
feedshift solenoid tact in the connector. DP switchback feedsift solenoid and DP main PWB (YC9)
does not operate. Replace the DP switchback feedsift solenoid.
2. Defective solenoid
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
(8) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
DP switchback cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
pressure solenoid tact in the connector. DP switchback pressure solenoid and DP main PWB (YC9)
does not operate. Replace the DP switchback pressure solenoid.
2. Defective solenoid
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

(9) 1. A piece of paper torn Check visually and remove it, if any.
An original jams from an original is
when the main caught around the
power switch is DP feed sensor, DP
turned on. registration sensor,
DP timing sensor,
DP switchback
sensor, DP eject
sensor.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the DP feed sensor, DP registration sensor, DP
timing sensor, DP switchback sensor or DP eject sensor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

1-4-7
3NV

Problem Causes Check procedures / corrective measures


(10) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing the cover is tact in the connector. DP interlock switch and DP main PWB (YC6)
open is displayed Replace the DP interlock switch.
2. Defective switch.
when the DP top
cover is closed.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

(11) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
The table is cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
scanned when DP tact in the connector. DP open/close switch and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
is closed and the Check the hinges and DP reading guide.
2. Defective DP shut-
original is set. ting.
3. Defective switch. Replace the DP open/close switch.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.

1-4-8
3NV

1-4-4 Mechanical problems


Problem Causes / check procedures Corrective measures
(1) Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary original leys are dirty with paper powder.
feed. DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
Check if the following pulleys is Check visually and replace any
deformed. deformed (see page 1-5-2).
DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt

(2) Original is not correctly set. Set the original correctly.


Multiple sheets of orig- Check if the DP separation pulley is
Replace the DP separation pulley if it is
inal are fed.
worn. worn (see page 1-5-5).

(3) Originals being used do not conform with Use only originals conforming to the
Originals jam. the specifications. specifications.
Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
leys are dirty with paper powder.
DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
Check if the contact between the DP reg- Check visually and remedy if necessary.
istration roller and DP registration pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
upper conveying roller and DP conveying
pulley is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP left Check visually and remedy if necessary.
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP right Check visually and remedy if necessary.
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
eject roller and DP eject pulley is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
switchback roller and DP switchback pul-
ley is correct.

1-4-9
3NV

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-4-10
3NV

1-5 Assembly and Disassembly

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly


(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to turn power off. Make sure that the
Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug
the power cable from the wall outlet.
Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the internal
hard disk.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible
to static charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to
the PARTS LIST.

1-5-1
3NV

1-5-2 Assembly and disassembly


(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley
Follow the procedure below to replace the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley.

Procedure
1. Open the DP top cover. DP feed
DP top cover
2. Remove the screw and then remove the shaft guide
DP feed shaft guide.

Screw

Figure 1-5-1

3. Remove the stop ring and then remove


the DP feed unit from the DP.

DP feed unit

Stop ring

Figure 1-5-2

1-5-2
3NV

DP feed belt unit


4. Remove the DP feed belt unit from the
inserted parts of the DP feed unit.

DP feed unit
Figure 1-5-3

5. Remove two stop rings from the DP feed belt shaft


A.
6. Remove the pulley, pin and DP feed holder from the
shorter shaft side.
Slide the pulley and the DP feed holder at the longer
shaft side.
7. Pull out the DP feed belt shaft A from the DP feed
belt unit and then remove the DP feed collar A.
Stop ring

Pin Stop ring


Pin
Pulley

DP feed holder

DP feed collar A

DP feed belt unit

DP feed holder

Pulley

DP feed belt shaft A

Figure 1-5-4

1-5-3
3NV

8. Remove the DP feed belt shaft B from the DP feed belt shaft B
DP feed belt unit.
9. Remove the DP feed collar B and DP
DP feed collar B
feed belt from DP feed belt shaft B. DP feed belt unit

DP original feed belt

Figure 1-5-5

10. Remove two stop rings from the DP for- DP forwarding pulley
warding pulley shaft. Pulley
11. Remove two pulleys and pins. Bush
12. Pull out the DP forwarding pulley shaft Pin
from the DP feed unit and then remove Stop ring
the DP forwarding pulley.
Pin
13. Check or replace the DP feed belt and
Stop ring
DP forwarding pulley and refit all the
removed parts. DP forwarding
pulley shaft

Bush
Pulley

DP feed unit

Figure 1-5-6

1-5-4
3NV

(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley


Follow the procedure below to replace the DP separation pulley.

Procedure DP upper
1. Open the DP top cover. DP top cover shift guide
2. Open the DP upper shift guide.
3. Remove two screws and then remove Screw
the DP lower feed guide.

Screw

DP lower feed guide

Figure 1-5-7

4. Remove the stop ring and then remove


the DP separation pulley and torque
limiter.
5. Check or replace the DP separation
pulley and refit all the removed parts.

Stop ring
Torque limiter
DP separation
pulley

Figure 1-5-8

1-5-5
3NV

1-5-3 Image adjustment


(1) Adjusting the angle of leading edge
Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.

Procedure
3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of leading edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
Reference value
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm Original Copy Copy
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm example 1 example 2

Figure 1-5-9

3. Loosen two screws of right and left fix-


ing fittings.

Fixing fitting

Screw

Screw
Fixing fitting

Screw
Fixing fitting

Figure 1-5-10

1-5-6
3NV

4. Turn adjusting screw at the rear side of


the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example 1: Turn the adjusting
screw counterclockwise and move the
DP to the inner side.
For copy example 2: Turn the adjusting
screw clockwise and move the DP to
the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1
mm
5. Make a test copy.
6. Repeat the steps above until the gap of
the leading edge falls within the refer-
ence values.
7. After adjustment is completed, retighten
two screws that have been loosened in
step 3.
Adjusting screw

Figure 1-5-11

8. Remove the original mat.


9. Place original mat with its Velcro
upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left cor-
ner of the original instruction panel.
10. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcro.

DP
Original mat
Original mat

Velcro

Figure 1-5-12

1-5-7
3NV

(2) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge


Perform the following adjustment if the trailing edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.

Procedure
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of trailing edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm
Reference value Original Copy Copy
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm example 1 example 2
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm

Figure 1-5-13

3. Open the DP top cover. DP top cover


4. Remove four screws and then remove
the DP rear cover.
Screw

DP rear cover

Screw

Screw
Screw

Figure 1-5-14

1-5-8
3NV

5. Adjust the height of DP.


Loosen the nut.
For copy example 1: Loosen the adjust-
ing screw.
For copy example 2: Tighten the adjust-
ing screw.
Amount of change per scale: Approx.
0.5 mm
Retighten the nut.
6. Refit the DP rear cover. Adjuting screw
Nut

Scale

Figure 1-5-15
7. Remove the original mat.
8. Place original mat with its Velcro
upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left cor-
ner of the original instruction panel.
9. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcro.

DP
Original mat
Original mat

Velcro

Figure 1-5-16

10. Make a test copy again.


11. Repeat steps 1 to 9 above until the gap
of the trailing edge falls within the refer-
ence values.

1-5-9
3NV

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-5-10
3NV-4

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

1-6-1 Remarks on DP main PWB replacement


When replacing the DP main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YS1) from the DP main PWB that has been
removed and then reattach it to the new DP main PWB.

EEPROM

YS1

Figure 1-6-1 DP main PWB

When the DP main PWB is replaced with a new one, carry out the following procedure.
1. Perform maintenance mode U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) : DP FaceUp (Chart2)
(see 1-3-37).

1-6-1
3NV

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-6-2
3NV

2-1 Mechanical Construction

2-1-1 Original feed section


The original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure. An original placed on the original table is con-
veyed to the original conveying section. Original is fed by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP orig-
inal feed belt. The DP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque
limiter.

6 5 7 9 4 3 2 1

11 8 10

Figure 2-1-1 Original feed section

1. Original tray 6. DP feed collar A


2. DP original width switch 7. DP feed collar B
(DPOWSW) 8. DP separation pulley
3. Original lift guide 9. DP original sensor (DPOS)
4. DP forwarding pulley 10. Actuator (DP original sensor)
5. DP feed belt 11. DP feed sensor (DPFS)

2-1-1
FEED_2B,2A,1A,1B
YC5-1,2,3,4

DPOFM
FD_SW
YC4-A5

DPFS
LIFT_2B,2A,1A,1B
YC5-9,10,11,12

DPLM
LF_DNSW
YC2-10
DPLS2
DPLS1

LF_UPSW
YC4-A3

SET SW

2-1-2
YC4-A12
DPOS

DPMPWB

Figure 2-1-2 Original feed section block diagram


WIDE3,2,1
YC2-11,12,14
DPOWSW
3NV-1
3NV

2-1-2 Original conveying section


The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in figure. A conveyed original is scanned by the
optical section (CCD) of machine when it passes through the slit glass of machine.

3 1

14 10

8 7 13 12 9 11

Figure 2-1-3 Original conveying section

1. DP registration sensor (DPRS) 8. DP conveying pulley


2. DP registration roller 9. DP conveying pulley
3. DP registration pulley 10. DP right conveying roller
4. DP upper conveying roller 11. DP conveying pulley
5. DP conveying pulley 12. Slit glass (machine main body)
6. DP timing sensor (DPTS) 13. Reading pulley
7. DP left conveying roller 14. Reading guide

2-1-3
3NV

RGST_SW
DPRS YC4-A8

FEED_2B,2A,1A,1B
DPOFM YC5-1,2,3,4

CNVY_2B,2A,1B,1A
DPOCM YC14-1,2,3,4

CCD _TMG_SW
DPTS YC4-B6

DPMPWB

Figure 2-1-4 Original conveying section block diagram

2-1-4
3NV

2-1-3 Original switchback/eject sections


The original switchback/eject sections consists of the parts shown in figure. An original of which scanning is
complete is ejected to the original eject table by the DP eject roller. In the case of duplex switchback scanning,
an original is conveyed temporarily to the DP switchback tray and conveyed again to the original conveying
section by the DP switchback roller.

3 5 4 7 6

2 13

1 10 9 11 12 8 14

Figure 2-1-5 Original switchback/eject sections

1. DP switchback feedshift guide 8. DP switchback tray


2. DP eject feedshift guide 9. DP feedshift roller
3. DP upper feedshift guide 10. DP feedshift pulley
4. DP switchback roller 11. DP eject sensor (DPES)
5. DP switchback pulley 12. DP eject roller
6. DP switchback sensor (DPSBS) 13. DP eject pulley
7. Actuator (DP switchback sensor) 14. Original eject table

2-1-5
3NV-1

DPPSOL

DPSBS

DPSBM
DPFSSOL DPES

RVRS_1B,1A,2A,2B

PRS_SOL_P,R
JNC_SOL_P,K

TRAY_SW
EXIT SW
YC9-5,6

YC3-2

YC14-5,6,7,8

YC4-B13

YC9-2,3

DPMPWB

Figure 2-1-6 Original switchback/eject sections block diagram

2-1-6
3NV

(1) Reverse duplex scanning operation


2
3
The first side of original is scanned
at the slit glass (machine main
body).
1

Slit glass: first side scanning

2
3

Conveyed to the DP switchback


tray by the DP switchback feedshift DP switchback tray
guide. 1
DP switchback feedshift guide

2
3
1
The original is reversed by the DP
switchback roller.

DP switchback roller

2
3
The second side of original is
scanned at the slit glass (machine 1 DP switchback tray
main body) and the original is
conveyed to the DP switchback tray.

Slit glass: second side scanning

Ejected to the original eject table by


the DP switchback, DP feedshift DP switchback roller 2
and DP eject rollers. 3 1
DP feedshift roller
DP eject roller Original eject table

Figure 2-1-7

2-1-7
3NV

This page is intentionally left blank.

2-1-8
3NV

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout


(1) PWBs

2
1

Machine front Machine inside Machine rear

Figure 2-2-1 PWBs

1. DP main PWB (DPMPWB) ................... Controls electrical components.


2. DP LED PWB (DPLPWB) ..................... Indicates presence of originals or an original jam.

2-2-1
3NV

(2) Switches and sensors

4 6
2
5
9 8 3 7

11

10 1 12

Machine front Machine inside Machine rear

Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors

1. DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) ........ Detects the opening/closing of the DP.


2. DP interlock switch (DPILSW) .............. Breaks the safety circuit when the document processor is
opened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. DP original sensor (DPOS) ................... Detects the presence of an original.
4. DP lift sensor1 (DPLS1) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the upper limit.
5. DP lift sensor2 (DPLS2) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the lower limit.
6. DP original length switch (DPOLSW).... Detects the length of the original.
7. DP original width switch (DPOWSW).... Detects the width of the original.
8. DP feed sensor (DPFS) ........................ Detects primary original feed end timing.
9. DP registration sensor (DPRS) ............. Detects the original conveying timing.
10. DP timing sensor (DPTS)...................... Detects the original scanning timing.
11. DP switchback sensor (DPSBS) ........... Detects the original in switchback tray section.
12. DP eject sensor (DPES) ....................... Detects an original misfeed in the original eject section.

2-2-2
3NV

(3) Motors

1 4

3
2

Machine front Machine inside Machine rear

Figure 2-2-3 Motors

1. DP feed motor (DPOFM) ...................... Drives the original feeding section.


2. DP conveying motor (DPOCM)............. Drives the original conveying section.
3. DP switchback motor (DPSBM) ............ Drives the switchback roller.
4. DP lift motor (DPLM)............................. Operates the original lift guide.

2-2-3
3NV

(4) Others

Machine front Machine inside Machine rear

Figure 2-2-4 Others

1. DP switchback feedshift solenoid


(DPFSSOL) ............................................ Operates the switchback feedshift guide.
2. DP switchback pressure solenoid
(DPPSOL) .............................................. Operates the switchback pulley.

2-2-4
3NV

2-3 Operation of the PWBs

2-3-1 DP main PWB

1 15
2 16
YC1

YS1

B13 A1

YC4

B1 A13
1 2

1
YC2
YC6

13 3
14
1
YC3
3

6 YC9 1 YC5
1 YC14 8 12 1

Figure 2-3-1 DP main PWB silk-screen diagram

2-3-1
3NV

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description


YC1 1 FG
Connected to 2 ENG_PAGES O 0/3.3 V DC Pageset signal
ISCPWB. T
3 ENG_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
6 ENG_SI I 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 ENG_SO O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 DP_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
9 NC(GND) - - Not used
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 NC(GND) - - Not used
14 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
15 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
16 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from ISCPWB

YC2 1 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOLSW


Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
DP original 3 LNG_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPOLSW: On/Off
length switch,
DP lift sensor 4 LNG_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
2, DP origi- 5 NC - - Not used
nal width
6 NC - - Not used
switch.
7 NC - - Not used
8 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPLS2
9 GND - - Ground
10 LF_DNSW I 0/3.3 V DC DPLS2: On/Off
11 WIDE3 I 0/3.3 V DC DPOWS: On/Off
12 WIDE2 I 0/3.3 V DC DPOWS: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
14 WIDE1 I 0/3.3 V DC DPOWS: On/Off

YC3 1 GND - - Ground


Connected to 2 EXIT_SW(V) I 0/3.3 V DC DPES: On/Off
DP eject sen-
3 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPES
sor.

2-3-2
3NV

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description


YC4_A A1 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPLS1
Connected to A2 GND - - Ground
DP lift sensor
A3 LF_UPSW I 0/3.3 V DC DPLS1: On/Off
1, DP feed
sensor, DP A4 GND - - Ground
registration A5 FD_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPFS: On/Off
sensor, DP
A6 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPFS
original sen-
sor. A7 GND - - Ground
A8 RGST_SW(V) I 0/3.3 V DC DPRS: On/Off
A9 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRS
A10 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOS
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 SET_SW(V) I 0/3.3 V DC DPOS: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
YC4_B B1 NC - - Not used
Connected to B2 LED_PW O 5.6V DC 5.6 V DC power output to LEDPWB
DP LED
B3 LED_REM O 0/5.6 V DC LED control signal
PWB, DP tim-
ing sensor, B4 NC(GND) - - Not used
DP open/ B5 GND - - Ground
close switch,
B6 CCD_TMG_S I 0/3.3 V DC DPTS: On/Off
DP switch-
W
back sensor.
B7 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPTS
B8 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOCSW
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
B11 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPSBS
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 TRAY_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DPSBS: On/Off
1 FEED3_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
YC5
2B
Connected to 2 FEED1_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
DP feed 2A
motor, DP lift
3 FEED2_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
motor.
1A
4 FEED4_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
1B
5 NC - - Not used
6 NC - - Not used
7 NC - - Not used
8 NC - - Not used

2-3-3
3NV

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description


9 LIFT3_OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
YC5
B
Connected to 10 LIFT1_OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
DP feed A
motor, DP lift
11 LIFT2_OUT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
motor.
A
12 LIFT4_OUT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
B

YC6 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPILSW


Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
DP interlock 3 R24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from DPILSW
switch.

YC9 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPPSOL


Connected to 2 PRS_SOL_P O 0/24 V DC DPPSOL: On/Off (actuate)
DP switch- ULL
back pressure 3 PRS_SOL_R O 0/24 V DC DPPSOL: On/Off (return)
solenoid, DP TN
switchback
feedshift sole- 4 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DPFSSOL
noid. 5 JNC_SOL_P O 0/24 V DC DPFSSOL: On/Off (actuate)
ULL
6 JNC_SOL_K O 0/24 V DC DPFSSOL: On/Off (keep)
EEP

1 CNVY4_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal


YC14
2B
DP convey- 2 CNVY3_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
ing motor, DP 2A
switchback
3 CNVY2_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
motor.
1B
4 CNVY1_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
1A
5 RVRS4_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSBM drive control signal
1B
6 RVRS2_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSBM drive control signal
1A
7 RVRS1_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSBM drive control signal
2A
8 RVRS3_OUT O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSBM drive control signal
2B

2-3-4
3NV-3

2-4 Appendixes

2-4-1 Appendixes
(1) List of maintenance parts
Maintenance part name Alternative
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list part No.
DP paper feed belt BELT PF 303LL07490 3LL07490
DP forwarding pulley PULLEY LF 303M407480 3M407480
DP separation pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 303LL07190 3LL07190
DP original sensor PARATS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94040 3NW94040
DP registration roller PARTS ROLLER REGISTRATION 303LL94090 3LL94090
DP registration pulley PULLEY,REGISTRATION BK 303M424300 3M424300
DP registration pulley PULLEY REG B BK 303M424310 3M424310
DP conveying roller left PARATS ROLLER CONVEING 303LL94060 3LL94060
LEFT
DP conveying pulley PULLEY CONVEYING BK 303NV24010 3NV24010
DP conveying roller right PARATS ROLLER CONVEING 303LL94071 3LL94071
RIGHT
DP conveying roller upper PARATS ROLLER CONVEING 303LL94080 3LL94080
UPPER
Reading pulley PULLEY READING BK 303NV24020 3NV24020
DP eject roller PARET ROLLER EJECT 303LL94100 3LL94100
DP eject pulley PULLEY EXIT 303JX28030 3JX28030
DP switchback roller PARETS ROLLER LOOP 303LL94110 3LL94110
DP shift roller PARTS ROLLER EJECT SHIFT 303LL94120 3LL94120
DP switchback pulley PULLEY LOOP 3HL10140 -
Reading guide GUIDE READING 303LL24010 3LL24010
DP registration sensor PARATS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94040 3NW94040
DP timing sensor PARATS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94040 3NW94040
DP original length switch PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94050 3NW94050
Original mat PARTS MAT ASSY 303LL94031 3LL94031

2-4-1
3NV

(2) Periodic maintenance procedures


Maintenance User 300K/600K/
Section Points and cautions Page
part/location call 900K/1200K
Test copy Perform at the maxi- Test Test
and test mum copy size copy copy

Section Maintenance User 300K/600K/ Points and cautions Page


part/location call 900K/1200K
Original DP paper feed belt Clean Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-2
feed sec- Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
tion DP forwarding pulley Clean Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-2
Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
DP separation pulley Clean Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-5
Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
DP original sensor Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.

Section Maintenance User 300K/600K/ Points and cautions Page


part/location call 900K/1200K
Original DP registration roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
convey- DP registration pul- Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
ing sec- ley
tion
DP registration pul- Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
ley
DP conveying roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
left
DP conveying pulley Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP conveying roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
right
DP conveying roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
upper
Reading pulley Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP eject roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP eject pulley Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP switchback roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP shift roller Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP switchback pulley Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
Reading guide Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP registration sen- Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
sor
DP timing sensor Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.

2-4-2
3NV

Section Maintenance User 300K/600K/ Points and cautions Page


part/location call 900K/1200K
Original DP original length Clean Clean Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
table switch

Section Maintenance User 300K/600K/ Points and cautions Page


part/location call 900K/1200K
Covers Covers Clean Clean Clean with alcohol.
Original mat Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.

Section Maintenance User 300K/600K/ Points and cautions Page


part/location call 900K/1200K
Other Image quality Check Check
Adjust Adjust

2-4-3
YC12 YC1
GND 1 1 1 1 FG
DP_PAGEST 2 2 2 2 ENG_PAGEST
DP_RDY 3 3 3 3 ENG_RDY
DP_SEL 4 4 4 4 ENG_SEL
DP_CLK 5 5 5 5 ENG_CLK
DP_SO 6 6 6 6 ENG_SI
DP_SI 7 7 7 7 ENG_SO
ISCPWB DP_OPEN 8 8 8 8 DP_OPEN
RESERVE 9 9 9 9 NC(GND)
GND 10 10 10 10 GND
GND 11 11 11 11 GND
GND 12 12 12 12 GND
RESERVE 13 13 13 13 NC(GND) YC2
24V 14 14 14 14 24V 3.3V 1 1 4 4 3.3V
24V 15 15 15 15 24V GND 2 2 3 3 GND
24V 16 16 16 16 24V LNG_SW 3 3 2 2 LNG_SW DPOLSW
(3) Wiring diagram

LNG_CLK 4 4 1 1 LNG_CLK
NC 5 5
NC 6 6
NC 7 7
YC4_A ANODE 8 8
ANODE 3 3 A1 A1 ANODE GND 9 9
DPLS1 GND 2 2 A2 A2 GND LF_DNSW 10 10
LF_UPSW 1 1 A3 A3 LF_UPSW WIDE3 11 11
A4 A4 GND WIDE2 12 12
A5 A5 FD_SW GND 13 13
A6 A6 3.3V WIDE1 14 14 3 3 ANODE
GND 3 3 A7 A7 GND 2 2 GND DPLS2
DPFS FD_SW 2 2 A8 A8 RGST_SW 1 1 LF_DNSW
3.3V 1 1 A9 A9 3.3V
A10 A10 ANODE
A11 A11 GND DPMPWB
A12 A12 SET_SW 4 4 WIDE3
GND 3 3 A13 A13 NC 3 3 WIDE2
DPRS RGST_SW 2 2 2 2 GND DPOWSW
3.3V 1 1 1 1 WIDE1

ANODE 3 3
DPOS GND 2 2
SET_SW 1 1

YC4_B
B1 B1 NC

2-4-4
LED_PW 2 2 1 2 B2 B2 LED_PW
DPLPWB Relay
LED_REM 1 1 2 1 B3 B3 LED_REM
B4 B4 GND
B5 B5 GND
B6 B6 CCD_TMG_SW
B7 B7 3.3V YC5 2 2 NC
GND 3 3 1 3 B8 B8 ANODE FEED3_OUT2B 1 1 1 1 B/
DPTS CCD_TMG_SW 2 2 2 Relay 2 B9 B9 GND FEED1_OUT2A 2 2 3 3 B
3.3V 1 1 3 1 B10 B10 DP_OPEN FEED2_OUT1A 3 3 4 4 A DPOFM
B11 B11 ANODE FEED4_OUT1B 4 4 6 6 A/
B12 B12 GND NC 5 5 5 5 NC
B13 B13 TRAY_SW NC 6 6
ANODE 3 3 1 3 NC 7 7
DPOCSW GND 2 2 2 Relay 2 NC 8 8
LF_DNSW 1 1 3 1 LIFT3_OUT2B 9 9
LIFT1_OUT2A 10 10
LIFT2_OUT1A 11 11
LIFT4_OUT1B 12 12
ANODE 3 3 1 3
DPSBS GND 2 2 2 Relay 2
TRAY_SW 1 1 3 1

YC3 1 1 B/
GND 3 3 1 1 GND 2 2 B
DPES EXIT_SW 2 2 2 2 EXIT_SW 3 3 A DPLM
3.3V 1 1 3 3 3.3V 4 4 A/

YC6
COM 1 1 1 24V
DPILSW NO 2 2 2 NC
3 3 R24V YC14 2 2 NC
CNVY4_OUT2B 1 1 1 1 B/
CNVY3_OUT2A 2 2 3 3 B
YC9 CNVY2_OUT1B 3 3 6 6 A/ DPOCM
1 3 1 1 R24V CNVY1_OUT1A 4 4 4 4 A
2 Relay 2 2 2 PRS_SOL_PULL RVRS4_OUT1B 5 5 5 5 NC
DPPSOL RVRS2_OUT1A 6 6
3 1 3 3 PRS_SOL_RTN
4 4 R24V RVRS1_OUT2A 7 7
5 5 JNC_SOL_PULL RVRS3_OUT2B 8 8 2 2 NC
6 6 JNC_SOL_KEEP 6 6 A/
1 3 1 3 4 4 A
DPFSSOL 2 Relay 2 2 Relay 2 3 3 B DPSBM
3 1 3 1 1 1 B/
5 5 NC
3NV-1
1-1 INSTALLATION GUIDE

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
INSTALLATION GUIDE

GUIDE D’INSTALLATION

GUÍA DE INSTALACION

INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG

GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE

安装手册

설치안내서

設置手順書

DP-770(B)
DP-771(B)
DP-772(B)
for Color MFP 30/30ppm,35/35ppm,45/45ppm,55/50ppm (
for Black & White MFP 35ppm,45ppm,55ppm
DP-771/772
B F
K*

G(M4x14)(8)

C*
K**
E-1 J(M3x8)
D E-2

M N(M3x8) L

A C H I

D. Angle control fitting............................................... 1 J. M3 × 8 screw BLACK*1 ......................................... 1


English
E-1.DP cable cover1 ................................................. 1 K. Label “Operation procedure” ................................1
Supplied parts E-2.DP cable cover2 ................................................. 1 *: for metric specification
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 F. Pin ........................................................................ 1 **: for inch specification
B. Original mat.......................................................... 1 G. M4 × 14TP screw ................................................. 8 L. Caution label “Original face up!”...........................1
C. Fixing fitting (width: 38.5 mm) ..........2 (DP-770(B)) H. Left hinge cover*1 .................................................. 1 M. DP relay PWB*1 .................................................... 1
1 (DP-771/772) I. Right hinge cover*1 ............................................... 1 N. M3 × 8 screw*2 ...................................................... 2
C*. Fixing fitting (width: 45 mm)*1 .............................. 1 *1: DP-771/772 only , *2: DP-772 only

D. Fixation d’angle .................................................... 1 K. Étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation........ 1


Français
E-1.Couvercle du câble du DP1................................ 1 * : pour des spécifications métriques
Pièces fournies E-2.Couvercle du câble du DP2................................ 1 ** : pour des spécifications anglo-saxonnes
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 F. Goupille ................................................................ 1 L. Étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation
B. Plaque d’original .................................................. 1 G. Vis TP M4 × 14..................................................... 8 vers le haut de la face de l’original ......................1
C. Fixation (largeur: 38,5 mm).................. 2 (DP-770(B)) H. Couvercle de charnière gauche*1 ......................... 1 M. Carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP*1 .................1
1 (DP-771/772) I. Couvercle de charnière droite*1 ............................ 1 N. Vis M3 × 8*2 ......................................................... 2
C.*Fixation (largeur: 45 mm)*1 ................................... 1 J. Vis M3 × 8 NOIRE*1 .............................................. 1 *1: DP-771/772 uniquement , *2: DP-772 uniquement

C*.Herraje de fijación (anchura: 45 mm)*1 ................. 1 J. Tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO*1 ......................................1


Español
D. Herraje de control de ángulo................................ 1 K. Etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” ..................... 1
Partes suministradas E-1.Cubierta del cable del DP1................................. 1 *: para especificaciones en el sistema métrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Cubierta del cable del DP2................................. 1 **: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas
B. Alfombrilla para originales.................................... 1 F. Pasador................................................................ 1 L. Etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” ......1
C. Herraje de fijación (anchura: 38,5 mm) G. Tornillo TP M4 × 14 .............................................. 8 M. PWB del relé del DP*1...........................................1
.........................................................2 (DP-770(B)) H. Cubierta de la bisagra izquierda*1 ........................ 1 N. Tornillo M3 × 8*2 .................................................... 2
1(DP-771/772) I. Cubierta de la bisagra derecha*1 .......................... 1 *1: DP-771/772 solamente , *2: DP-772 solamente

C*.Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 45 mm)*1.............. 1 J. M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ*1 ............................. 1


Deutsch
D. Winkeleinstellbefestigung..................................... 1 K. Schild “Funktionsanweisung” ..............................1
Enthaltene Teile E-1.DP-Kabelabdeckung1......................................... 1 *: für metrische Angaben
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.DP-Kabelabdeckung2......................................... 1 **: für Angaben in Zoll
B. Originalmatte........................................................ 1 F. Stift ....................................................................... 1 L. Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” ........ 1
C. Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 38,5 mm) G. M4 × 14TP Schraube ........................................... 8 M. DP-Relaisleiterplatte *1.......................................... 1
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B)) H. Linke Scharnierabdeckung*1................................. 1 N. M3 × 8 Schraube*2 ................................................2
1 (DP-771/772) I. Rechte Scharnierabdeckung*1 .............................. 1 *1: nur DP-771/772 , *2: nur DP-772

C*. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 45 mm)*1 ...... 1 J. Vite M3 × 8 NERA*1 .............................................. 1


Italiano
D. Accessorio di regolazione angolare ..................... 1 K. Etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” ..............1
Parti fornite E-1.Coperchio del cavo DP1..................................... 1 *: per specifiche in unità del sistema metrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Coperchio del cavo DP2..................................... 1 **: per specifiche in pollici
B. Tappetino originale ............................................... 1 F. Perno.................................................................... 1 L. Etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” ... 1
C. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 38,5 mm) G. Vite M4 × 14TP .................................................... 8 M. Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP*1 ...1
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B)) H. Coperchio cerniera sinistra*1 ................................ 1 N. Vite M3 × 8*2 ......................................................... 2
1 (DP-771/772) I. Coperchio cerniera destra*1 .................................. 1 *1: Solo DP-771/772 , *2: Solo DP-772

简体中文 C*.固定工具 ( 宽 45mm) *1 ..................1 I. 右部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1


D. 角度限制工具 .........................1 J. M3×8 螺丝 BLACK*1 .....................1
附属品 E-1.DP 电缆盖板 1 ....................... 1 M. DP 中继板 *1 ...........................1
A. DP................................... 1 E-2.DP 电缆盖板 2 ....................... 1 N. M3×8 螺丝 *2 ..........................2
B. 原稿垫............................... 1 F. 销 ...................................1 *1: 仅限 DP-771/772
C. 固定工具 ( 宽 38.5mm) ...... 2(DP-770(B)) G. M4×14TP 螺丝 .........................8 *2: 仅限 DP-772
1(DP-771/772) H. 左部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1 (K) 和 (L) 并非附属品。

한국어 C*.고정쇠 (45mm 폭 ) *1 ................................1 I. 힌지커버 우 *1 ......................................... 1


D. 각도 고정쇠 ........................................... 1 J. 나사 M3×8BLACK*1 ................................ 1
동봉품 E-1.DP 케이블커버 1................................... 1 M. DP 중계기판 *1 ....................................... 1
A. DP........................................................ 1 E-2.DP 케이블커버 2................................... 1 N. 나사 M3×8*2 .......................................... 2
B. 원고매트................................................ 1 F. 핀 ........................................................ 1 *1: DP-771/772 만
C. 고정쇠 (38.5mm 폭 ) .............. 2(DP-770(B)) G. 나사 M4×14TP ...................................... 8 *2: DP-772 만
1(DP-771/772) H. 힌지커버 좌 *1 ..........................................1 (K)(L)는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 .

日本語 C*.固定金具 (45mm 幅 )*1 ...................1 I. 右ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1


D. 角度規制金具 ........................ 1 J. ビス M3×8BLACK*1 ......................1
同梱品 E-1.DP ケーブルカバー1 .................. 1 M. DP 中継基板 *1 ........................ 1
A. DP.................................. 1 E-2.DP ケーブルカバー2 .................. 1 N. ビス M3×8*2 .......................... 2
B. 原稿マット........................... 1 F. ピン ................................ 1 *1:DP-771/772 のみ
C. 固定金具 (38.5mm 幅 ) ...... 2(DP-770(B)) G. ビス M4×14TP ........................ 8 *2:DP-772 のみ
1(DP-771/772) H. 左ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1 (K)(L) は、 同梱されていない。

1
O

O. Memory DIMM (1GB)


(except 120V specification) ....................... 1
The memory DIMM must be expanded separately before using the “Dual scan function” on the
DP-771.
Order a memory DIMM in the service parts.
For details, see the instructions on page 12.

O. Mémoire DIMM (1GB)


(sauf specifications 120V) .......................... 1
La mémoire DIMM doit être expansée séparément avant utilisation de la "Fonction double balay-
age" du DP-771.
Commander une mémoire DIMM auprès du service des pièces de rechange.
Pour plus de précisions, se reporter aux instructions de la page 12.

O. Memoria DIMM (1GB)


(excepto especificaciones para 120V)....... 1
La memoria DIMM debe ampliarse de forma separada antes de utilizar la “Función de escaneado
doble” del DP-771.
Realice un pedido de una memoria DIMM de repuesto.
Consulte las instrucciones de la página 12 para obtener información más detallada.

O. Speicher-DIMM (1GB)
(auser 120-V-Spezifikation) ....................... 1
Die DIMM-Speichermodule müssen separat aufgerüstet werden, bevor man die “Dual Scan Funk-
tion” des DP-771 benutzt.
Bestellen Sie ein DIMM-Speichermodul zusammen mit den Serviceteilen.
Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie in den Anleitungen auf Seite 12.

O. Memoria DIMM (1GB)


(eccetto per i modellicon specifica 120V) .. 1
La memoria DIMM deve essere espansa separatamente prima di usare la “Funzione di scansione
dual” sull'unità DP-771.
Ordinare una memoria DIMM dalle parti di servizio.
per maggiori informazioni in merito si prega di leggere le istruzioni riportate a pagina 12.

O. 内存模组 DIMM (1GB)


(120V 型号以外 ) ..................... 1
在使用 DP-771 的「一次双面扫描功能」时,必需要增加内存卡。
请订购维修部件 DIMM 内存。
有关详情,请参阅第 12 页的说明。

O. 메모리 DIMM(1GB)
(120V 사양 이외 ) ............................... 1
DP-771 의 「양면동시 스캔기능」을 사용하는 경우에는 별도 메모리 DIMM 의 증설이 필요합니
다.
서비스 부품으로 메모리 DIMM 을 발주해 주십시오 .
상세는 12 페이지를 참조해 주십시오 .

O. メモリーDIMM(1GB)
(120V 仕様以外)...................... 1
DP-771 の「両面同時読み込み機能」 を使用する場合は、別途メモリーDIMM の増設が必要です。
サービスパーツでメモリーDIMM を発注してください。
詳細は 12 ページ参照のこと

2
G(M4x14)
C
G(M4x14)

NOTICE Procedure Attach the fixing fitting (DP-770(B))


Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning Before starting installation, be sure to turn the 1.Align projections (1) of each fixing fitting (C)
materials from the parts supplied. main power switch of the machine off, and with holes (2) on the MFP and insert the fix-
The illustrations of the DP in the Installation unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. ing fittings (C) into the MFP.
Guide are for DP-771/772. 2.Secure each fixing fitting (C) with two M4 x
14TP screws (G).

REMARQUE Procédure Mettre en place la fixation (DP-770(B))


Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé- Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de 1.Aligner les saillies (1) de chacune des
sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des mettre la machine hors tension et de pièces de fixation (C) avec les trous (2) sur
pièces fournies. débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise le MFP et insérer ces pièces (C) dans le
Les schémas du DP dans le Guide d''installation murale. MFP.
concernent le DP-771/772. 2.Fixer chacune des pièces de fixation (C)
avec deux vis M4 x 14TP (G).

AVISO Procedimiento Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-770(B))


Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate- Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de 1.Alinee las salientes (1) de cada herraje de
rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas. apagar el interruptor de encendido de la fijación (C) con los orificios (2) del MFP e
Las ilustraciones del DP en la Guía de insta- máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación inserte los herrajes de fijación (C) en el MFP.
lación corresponden al DP-771/772. de la toma de pared. 2.Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación
(C) con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP (G).

ANMERKUNG Vorgehensweise Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-


770(B))
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu-
1.Die Zapfen (1) jeder Befestigungshalterung
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
(C) mit den Öffnungen (2) am MFP ausrich-
Teilen entfernt wurden. ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
ten und die Befestigungshalterungen (C) in
Die Abbildungen des DP in der Steckdose gezogen ist. den MFP einsetzen.
Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP-771/ 2.Jede Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei M4
772. x 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
AVVISO Procedura Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-
770(B))
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
1.Allineare le sporgenze (1) di ogni accessorio
protezione dalle parti fornite. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
di fissaggio (C) con i fori (2) sull’MFP, ed
Le illustrazioni del DP nella Guida corrente.
inserire gli accessori di fissaggio (C)
all’installazione sono per il modello DP-771/772. nell’MFP.
2.Bloccare ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C)
con le due viti M4 x 14TP (G).
注意 安装步骤 安装固定工具(DP-770(B))
如果附属品上带有固定胶带,缓冲材料时务必揭 安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关,并从墙壁插 1.将各固定工具(C)上的突出部分(1)与 MFP
下。 座拔下电源插头。 上的孔(2)对齐,然后将固定工具(C)插入
安装手册中关于 DP 的图示以 DP-771/772 为例。 MFP 中。
2.用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)固定各固定工具
(C)。

주의 설치순서 고정쇠의 부착(DP-770(B))


동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 1.고정쇠 (C) 의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 의 구멍 (2)
우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 . 위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리 을 맞추고 MFP 에 고정쇠 (C) 를 꽂습니다 .
설치순서에 기재되어 있는 DP 일러스트는 DP- 하십시오 . 2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 2 개의 고정쇠
771/772 입니다 . (C) 를 고정합니다 .

注意 取付手順 固定金具の取り付け(DP-770(B))
同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合 必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機 1.固定金具 (C) の突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) を
は必ず取り外すこと。 械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ 合わせ、MFP に固定金具 (C) を差し込む。
設置手順書に記載している DP のイラストは、 と。 2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で 2 つの固定金具
DP-771/772 です。 (C) を固定する。

3
G(M4x14)
C* G(M4x14)
G(M4x14) F

C G(M4x14)
C (C*)
A

2
C A
4

2
C (C*)
1 3
1 5

Attach the fixing fitting (DP-771/772) Install the DP 5.Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin
1.Align the projections (1) on the right fixing fit- 3.Align hinge hole (3) of DP (A) with pin (4) of (F) and two M4 × 14TP screws (G).
ting (C) and on the wider left fixing fitting (C*) fixing fitting (C), place DP (A) on the MFP.
with the respective holes (2) in the MFP and 4.Slide the DP (A) toward the front side and
then insert the fixing fittings into the MFP. engage hinges into hooks (5) on fixing fit-
2.Secure each of the fixing fittings (C) (C*) tings (C).
with 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G).

Mettre en place la fixation (DP-771/772) Installer le DP 5.Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant à
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de la fixation droite (C) 3.Aligner le trou de la charnière (3) du DP (A) l’aide de la goupille (F) et des deux vis TP
et de la fixation gauche plus large (C*) avec sur la goupille (4) de la fixation (C) et placer M4 × 14 (G).
les trous correspondants (2) du MFP et le DP (A) sur le MFP.
insérer les fixations dans le MFP. 4.Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l'avant et
2.Fixer chaque des fixations (C) (C*) avec 2 engager les charnières dans les crochets (5)
vis TP M4 × 14 (G). sur les pièces de fixation (C).

Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-771/772) Instale el DP 5.Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con
1. Alinee los salientes (1) del herraje de fijación dere- 3.Alinee el orificio de bisagra (3) del DP (A) el pasador (F) y dos tornillos TP M4 × 14
cho (C) y del herraje de fijación izquierdo más con el pasador (4) del herraje de fijación (C) (G).
ancho (C*) con los orificios correspondientes (2)
y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP.
del MFP y, después, inserte los herrajes de fijación
en el MFP. 4.Deslice el DP (A) hacia el frente y enganche
2. Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación (C) las bisagras en los ganchos (5) de los her-
(C*) con 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). rajes de fijación (C).
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-771/772) Installieren des DP 5.DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (F) und zwei M4
1. Die Zapfen (1) an der rechten Befestigungshalter- 3.Scharnierloch (3) des DP (A) mit Stift (4) der × 14TP Schrauben (G) am MFP befestigen.
ung (C) und an der breiteren Befestigungshalter-
Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten, und
ung (C*) mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen (2)
am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterun- DP (A) auf den MFP stellen.
gen in den MFP einsetzen. 4.Den DP (A) nach vorne hin verschieben und
2. Die Befestigungshalterungen (C) (C*) mit den 2 M4 die Scharniere in die Haken (5) an den Bef-
× 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. estigungshalterungen (C) einsetzen.

Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-771/ Montaggio del DP 5.Montare il DP (A) sull’MFP assicurandolo
772) 3.Allineare il foro della cerniera (3) del DP (A) con il perno (F) e due viti M4 × 14TP (G).
1. Allineare le sporgenze (1) sull'accessorio di fissag- con il perno (4) dell’accessorio di fissaggio
gio destro (C) e sull'accessorio di fissaggio sinistro (C), quindi posizionare il DP (A) sull’MFP.
più largo (C*) con i rispettivi fori (2) nell'MFP, e 4.Far scorrere il DP (A) verso il lato anteriore
quindi inserire gli accessori di fissaggio nell'MFP.
ed inserire le cerniere nei ganci (5) sugli
2. Fissare ciascuno degli accessori di fissaggio (C)
(C*) con 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G).
accessori di fissaggio (C).

安装固定工具 (DP-771/772) 安装 DP 5.用销(F)和两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)将 DP


1.将固定工具 (C) 从右侧、宽幅固定夹具 (C*) 3.将 DP(A)的铰链孔(3)对准固定工具(C)的 (A)安装到 MFP 上。
从左侧将各自的突出部分 (1) 与 MFP 的孔 销(4),并将 DP(A)放在 MFP 上。
(2) 对齐并插入到 MFP 中。 4.朝前侧滑动 DP(A),然后将铰链与固定工具
2.使用各 2 颗 M4×14 螺丝 TP(G) 来固定固定工 (C)上的卡扣(5)相啮合。
具 (C) 与固定工具 (C*)

고정쇠의 부착(DP-771/772) DP 부착 5.핀 (F) 1 개와 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로


1.우측에 고정쇠 (C), 좌측에 광폭 고정쇠 (C*) 3.DP(A) 의 힌지부 구멍 (3) 과 고정쇠 (C) 핀 DP(A) 를 MFP 에 고정합니다 .
각각의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 구멍 (2) 을 맞추고 (4) 을 맞추고 MFP 에 DP(A) 를 올립니다 .
MFP 에 꽂습니다 . 4..DP(A) 를 밀어 힌지부를 고정쇠 (C) 의 걸쇠
2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 고정쇠 (C) 와 (5) 에 끼웁니다 .
고정쇠 (C*) 를 고정합니다 .

固定金具の取り付け(DP-771/772) DP の取り付け 5.ピン (F)1 本とビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で


1.右側に固定金具 (C)、 左側に幅広の固定金具 3.DP(A) のヒンジ部の穴 (3) と固定金具 (C) DP(A) を MFP に固定する。
(C*) のそれぞれの突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) のピン (4) を合わせ、MFP に DP(A) を乗せ
を合わせ、MFP に差し込む。 る。
2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で固定金具 (C) と 4.DP(A) を手前にスライドさせ、ヒンジ部を固
固定金具 (C*) を固定する。 定金具 (C) の引っ掛け部 (5) にはめ込む。

4
6
8
A

12
9
11
G(M4x14)
D

10
7

Install the angle control fitting To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees 9.Remove stop ring (11) of angle control fitting
To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees 7.Open the upper cover (6) of the DP (A). (D) that has been installed in step 6 to
6.Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side 8.Remove the four screws (7) and (8) . remove shaft (12).
of the right hinge with two M4 × 14TP screws Remove the strap (9) from the rear cover
(G). (10). Remove the rear cover (10) of the DP
(A)

Installer la fixation d’angle Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture 9.Retirer l’anneau de butée (11) de la fixation
Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture du DP de 30 degrés d’angle (D) installée à l’étape 6 pour enlever
du DP de 60 degrés 7.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A). la tige (12).
6.Placer la fixation d’angle (D) à l’arrière de la 8.Retirer les quatre vis (7) et (8).Retirer la
charnière droite à l’aide des deux vis TP M4 courroie (9) du couvercle arrière (10).Retirer
× 14 (G). la couvercle arrière (10) du DP (A).

Instale el herraje de control de ángulo Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 30 9.Retire el anillo de retención (11) del herraje
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 60 grados de control de ángulo (D) que se instaló en el
grados 7.Abra la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A). paso 6 para retirar el eje (12).
6.Instale el herraje de control de ángulo (D) en 8.Quite los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8).Retire la
el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con correa (9) de la cubierta posterior (10).Quite
dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). la cubierta posterior (10) del DP (A).

Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswin- 9.Anschlagring (11) von der Winkeleinstellbef-
Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswin- kels des DP um 30 Grad estigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 6 mon-
kels des DP um 60 Grad 7. Die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A) öffnen. tiert wurde, um die Welle (12) zu entfernen.
6.Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rück- 8.Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und
seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 × (8).Entfernen Sie den Riemen (9) der hin-
14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. teren Abdeckung (10).Entfernen Sie die hin-
tere Abdeckung (10) des DP (A).

Montaggio dell’accessorio di regolazione Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura 9.Rimuovere l’anello di bloccaggio (11)
angolare del DP a 30 gradi dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D)
Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura 7.Aprire il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A). che era stato installato al Punto 6 per
del DP a 60 gradi 8.Togliere le quattro viti (7) e (8).Rimuovere la rimuovere l’albero (12).
6.Montare l’accessorio di regolazione ango- cinghietta (9) dal coperchio posteriore
lare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera (10).Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (10)
destra con due viti M4 × 14TP (G). del DP (A).

安装角度限制工具 若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 30 度 9.拆下在第 6 步中安装的角度控制配件(D)的


若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 60 度 7.打开 DP(A)的上盖板(6)。 止动环(11),以将轴(12)拆下。
6.在右部铰链的后部使用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝 8.取下 4 颗螺丝 (7),(8)。从后盖板 (10) 上取
(G)安装角度限制工具(D)。 下塑料片 (9)。取下 DP(A) 的后盖板 (10)。

각도 고정쇠의 부착 DP 개폐 각도를 30 도로 설정하는 경우 9.스텝 6 에서 부착한 각도 고정쇠 (D) 의 스톱


DP 개폐각도를 60 도로 설정하는 경우 7.DP(A) 의 DP 윗커버 (6) 를 엽니다 . 링 (11) 1 개를 제거하고 샤프트 (12) 를 제
6.우 힌지 뒷측에 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로 8.나사 (7), (8) 4 개를 제거합니다 . 스트랩 (9) 거합니다 .
각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 부착합니다 . 를 후면 커버 (10) 에서 제거합니다 .DP(A)
의 후면 커버 (10) 를 제거합니다 .

角度規制金具の取り付け DP 開閉角度を 30 度に設定する場合 9.手順 6 で取り付けた角度規制金具 (D) のス


DP 開閉角度を 60 度に設定する場合 7.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(6) を開く。 トップリング (11)1 個を外し、シャフト
6.右ヒンジ後側にビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で角度 8.ビス (7)、(8) 4 本を外す。 ストラップ (9) を (12) を取り外す。
規制金具 (D) を取り付ける。 後カバー(10) から外す。 DP(A) の後カバー
(10) を取り外す。

5
11 14

12

12

14
15

13

10. Insert shaft (12) into the rear side of the right Connect the DP signal line (DP-770(B) only) 14.Remove the DP cable connection cap (15)
hinge. For the DP-771/772, proceed to step 13 on from the DP cable connection cover (14).
11. Attach stop ring (11) to the notch of shaft (12) page 8.
and secure shaft (12).
13.Remove the screw (13) and remove the DP
12. Reinstall the rear cover (10) using the four
screws (7) and (8) removed in step 8.Attach the cable connection cover (14).
strap (9) in the rear cover (10).Close the upper
cover (6) of the DP (A).

10. Insérer la tige (12) à l’arrière de la charnière Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP- 14.Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du
droite. 770(B) uniquement) câble du DP (15) du couvercle de la connex-
11. Fixer l’anneau de butée (11) sur l’encoche de la
tige (12) et mettre en place la tige (12). Pour le DP-771/772, passer à l'étape 13 en ion du câble du DP (14).
12. Remonter la couvercle arrière (10) à l'aide des page 8.
quatre vis (7) et (8) retirées à l'étape 8.Fixer la 13.Déposer la vis (13) et déposer le couvercle
courroie (9) dans le couvercle arrière
(10).Refermer le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP de la connexion du câble du DP (14).
(A).

10. Inserte el eje (12) en el lado trasero de la bis- Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP- 14.Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP
agra derecha. 770(B) solamente) (15) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del
11. Fije el anillo de retención (11) a la muesca del Para el DP-771/772, vaya al paso 13 de la DP (14)
eje (12) y asegure el eje (12).
página 8.
12. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta posterior (10) con
los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8) que quitó en el paso 13.Quite el tornillo (13) y quite la cubierta de
8.Coloque la correa (9) de la cubierta posterior conexión del cable del DP (14).
(10).Cierre la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
10. Welle (12) in die Rückseite des rechten Scharniers Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur 14.Die Kappe (15) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
einsetzen.
11. Anschlagring (11) an der Wellenkerbe (12) anbrin- DP-770(B)) von der Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelan-
gen und Welle befestigen (12). Beim DP-771/772 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf schlusses abnehmen.
12. Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) wieder an. Seite 8.
Benutzen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und (8) aus 13.Die Schraube (13) entfernen und die
Schritt 8.Befestigen Sie den Riemen (9) der hin- Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
teren Abdeckung (10).Schließen Sie die obere
Abdeckung (6) des DP (A). abnehmen.
10. Inserire l’albero (12) nella parte posteriore della
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP- 14.Rimuovere il cappuccio (15) per la connes-
cerniera destra.
11. Applicare l’anello di bloccaggio (11) nell’incavo 770(B)) sione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connes-
dell’albero (12) e assicurare l’albero (12). Per il DP-771/772, procedere al passo 13 a sione del cavo DP (14).
12. Rimontare il coperchio posteriore (10) utilizzando pagina 8.
le quattro viti (7) e (8) rimosse al punto 8.Rimon- 13.Rimuovere la vite (13) e quindi rimuovere il
tare la cinghietta (9) sul coperchio posteriore coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP
(10).Chiudere il pannello superiore (6) del DP
(A). (14).

10.将轴(12)插入到右部铰链的后部。 连接 DP 信号线(仅限 DP-770(B)) 14.从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接


11.将止动环(11)安装到轴(12)的切口并将轴 DP-771/772 跳至 P8 的步骤 13。 用盖 (15)。
(12)固定。 13.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (13),拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板
12.使用步骤 8 中取下的 4 颗螺丝 (7),(8) 来按 (14)。
原样安装后盖板 (10)。把塑料片 (9) 安装到
后盖板 (10)。关闭 DP(A) 的 DP 上盖板 (6)。

10. 우 힌지 뒷측에 샤프트 (12) 를 삽입합니다 . DP 신호선의 접속(DP-770(B) 만) 14.DP 케이블 연결 커버 (14) 에서 DP 케이블
11. 스톱링 (11) 을 샤프트 (12) 의 노치에 부착하고 DP-771/772 은 P8 의 순서 13 으로 진행 . 연결 캡 (15) 을 제거합니다 .
샤프트 (12) 를 고정합니다 . 13.나사 (13) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 연결 커버
12. 순서 8 에서 제거한 나사 (7),(8) 4 개를 사용하 (14) 를 제거합니다 .
여 후면 커버 (10) 를 원래대로 부착합니다 . 스
트랩 (9) 을 후면 커버 (10) 에 부착합니다
.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (6) 를 닫습니다 .

10.右ヒンジ後側にシャフト (12) を挿入する。 DP 信号線の接続(DP-770(B) のみ) 14.DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) から DP ケーブ


11.ストップリング (11) をシャフト (12) の溝 DP-771/772 は P8 の手順 13 へ進む。 ル接続用フタ (15) を取り外す。
に取り付け、 シャフト (12) を固定する。 13.ビス (13)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ
12.手順 8 で外したビス (7)、(8) 4 本で後カ バー(14) を外す。
バー(10) を元通り取り付ける。 ストラップ
(9) を後カバー(10) に取り付ける。DP(A) の
DP 上カバー(6) を閉じる。

6
E-2
16 14
E

14
E-1
18
16

13

17
14

15.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) through 16.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) along the 17.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP
the hole in DP cable connection cover (14). groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1). Install cable connection cover (14) and install the
Connect the DP signal line connector (17) to the DP cable cover 2 (E-2). DP cable connection cover (14) using the
the connector (18) of the ISC PWB. screw (13) removed in step 13.
Proceed to step 27 on page 13

15.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (16) 16.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (16) 17.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) sur le
dans le trou du couvercle de connexion du dans la rainure du couvercle 1 du câble DP couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP
câble DP (14).Raccordez le connecteur de (E-1). Installez le couvercle 2 du câble DP (14) et installer le couvercle de la connexion
ligne de signal DP (17) sur le connecteur (E-2). du câble du DP (14) à l'aide de la vis (13)
(18) de l'ISC PWB. déposée à l'étape 13.
Passer à l'étape 27 de la page 13.

15.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP 16.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP 17. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la
(16) por el orificio de la cubierta de conexión (16) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14) e
de cables del DP (14).Conecte el conector cables 1 del DP (E-1).Instale la cubierta de instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del
de línea de señales del DP (17) al conector cables 2 del DP (E-2). DP (14) usando el tornillo (13) quitado en el
(18) de ISC PWB. paso 13.
Vaya al paso 27 de la página 13.

15.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP 16.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP 17.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeck-
durch die Öffnung der Steckerabdeckung durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1) ung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbrin-
(14) des DP.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der des DP.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeck- gen und die Abdeckung (14) des DP-
Signalleitung (17) des DP mit dem Steck- ung 2 (E-2) des DP. Kabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 13
verbinder (18) der ISC-Platine. entfernten Schraube (13) befestigen.
Weitergehen zu Schritt 27 auf Seite 13.

15.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 17..Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al
(16) nel foro presente sul coperchio del con- (16) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14),
nettore cavo DP (14). Collegare il connettore cavo DP 1 (E-1).Installare il coperchio del e quindi installare il coperchio di connes-
di linea del segnale DP (17) al connettore cavo DP 2 (E-2). sione del cavo DP (14) utilizzando la vite
(18) della scheda ISC PWB. (13) rimossa nel passo 13.
Procedere al passo 27 a pagina 13.

15.将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆连接盖板 16.将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆盖板 1(E-1) 17.将 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 安装到 DP 电缆连接盖板
(14)的孔。把 DP 信号线的接插件(17)和 的槽中。安装 DP 电缆盖板 2(E-2)。 (14) 上,使用步骤 13 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝
ISC 电路板的接插件(18)相连接。 (13) 来安装 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14)。
跳至 P13 的步骤 27。

15.DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (16) 을 DP 케이블 16.DP 케이블 커버 1(E-1) 의 홈을 따라 DP 시 17.DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 접속커버
접속커버 (14) 의 구멍으로 통과시킵니다 그널 라인 케이블 (16) 을 통과시킵니다 . DP (14) 에 부착하고 순서 13 에서 제거한 나사
.DP 신호 신호선 커넥터 (17) 를 ISC PWB 의 케이블 커버 2(E-2) 를 설치합니다 . (13) 1 개로 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 를 부
커넥터 (18) 에 연결합니다 . 착합니다 .
P13 의 순서 27 로 진행 .

15.DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) の穴に DP 信号 16.DP ケーブルカバー1(E-1) の溝に DP 信号線 17.DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続カ
線 (16) を通す。
DP 信号線コネクター(17) を (16) を通す。DP ケーブルカバー2(E-2) を取 バー(14) に取り付け、手順 13 で外したビス
ISC 基板のコネクター(18) に接続する。 り付ける。 (13)1 本で DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) を取
り付ける。
P13 の手順 27 へ進む。

7
22

20

22
35
19

21

Connect the DP signal line (DP-771/772 only) 14.Remove the screw (21) and remove the DP 15.Remove the DP cable connection cap (35)
13.Remove the 4 screws (19).Remove the DP cable connection cover (22). from the DP cable connection cover (22).
relay PWB cover (20).

Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP- 14.Déposer la vis (21) et déposer le couvercle 15.Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du
771/772 uniquement) de la connexion du câble du DP (22). câble du DP (35) du couvercle de la connex-
13.Retirez les 4 vis (19).Retirer le couvercle du ion du câble du DP (22).
circuit imprimé du relais du DP (20).

Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-771/ 14.Quite el tornillo (21) y quite la cubierta de 15.Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP
772 solamente) conexión del cable del DP (22). (35) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del
13.Quite los 4 tornillos (19).Retire la cubierta de DP (22).
PWB del relé del DP (20).

Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur 14.Die Schraube (21) entfernen und die 15.Die Kappe (35) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
DP-771/772) Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses von der Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelan-
13.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (19).Ent- abnehmen. schlusses abnehmen.
fernen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DP-
Verbindungsplatine zum Vorlageneinzug.

Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP- 14.Rimuovere la vite (21) e quindi rimuovere il 15.Rimuovere il cappuccio (35) per la connes-
771/772) coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP sione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connes-
13.Togliere le 4 viti (19).Rimuovere la scheda a (22). sione del cavo DP (22).
circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (20).

连接 DP 信号线(仅限 DP-771/772) 14.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (21),拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板 15.从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (22) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接
13.拆除 4 颗螺丝 (19)。取下 DP 中继板的盖板 (22)。 用盖 (35)。
(20)。

DP 시그널 라인 연결 (DP-771/772 만) 14.나사 (21) 1 개를 제거한 루 DP 케이블 연결 15.DP 케이블 연결 커버 (22) 에서 DP 케이블
13.나사 (19) 4 개를 제거합니다 . 캡 (22) 을 제거합니다 . 연결 캡 (35) 을 제거합니다 .
DP 중계기판 커버 (20) 를 제거합니다 .

DP 信号線の接続 (DP-771/772 のみ) 14.ビス (21)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ 15.DP ケーブル接続カバー(22) から DP ケーブ
13.ビス (19)4 本を外す。DP 中継基板カバー バー(22) を外す ル接続用フタ (35) を取り外す。
(20) を取り外す。

8
22 27

M
26

30
23

24 28
25
29

16.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) and the DP-771 only Installing the DP relay PWB
CIS data line cable (24) through the hole in 17.Remove the two screws (27).Remove the 18.Connect connector (29) on the DP relay
DP cable connection cover (22).Connect the bracket (28). PWB (M) to connector (30) on the MFP.
DP signal line connector (25) to the connec-
tor (26) of the ISC PWB.

16.Passez le câble de ligne de signal DP (23) et DP-771 uniquement Installation de la carte de circuit imprimé
le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) dans 17.Retirez les deux vis (27).Retirez le support relais du DP
le trou du couvercle de connexion du câble (28). 18.Raccorder le connecteur (29) sur la carte de
DP (22). Raccordez le connecteur de ligne circuit imprimé relais du DP (M) au
de signal DP (25) sur le connecteur (26) de connecteur (30) sur le MFP.
l'ISC PWB.

16.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP DP-771 solamente Instalación del PWB del relé del DP
(23) y el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) 17.Quite los dos tornillos (27).Quite la abraza- 18.Conecte el conector (29) del PWB del relé
por el orificio de la cubierta de conexión de dera (28). del DP (M) al conector (30) del MFP.
cables del DP (22). Conecte el conector de
línea de señales del DP (25) al conector (26)
de ISC PWB.

16.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP nur DP-771 Installieren der DP-Relaisleiterplatte
und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die 17.Entfernen Sie die beiden Schrauben 18.Den Stecker (29) an der DP-
Öffnung der Steckerabdeckung (22) des DP. (27).Entfernen Sie die Klammer (28). Relaisleiterplatte (M) mit dem Stecker (30)
Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung am MFP verbinden
(25) des DP mit dem Steckverbinder (26) der
ISC-Platine.

16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP Solo DP-771 Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati
(23) e il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) nel 17.Togliere le due viti (27).Rimuovere la staffa di comunicazione DP
foro presente sul coperchio del connettore (28). 18.Collegare il connettore (29) sulla scheda a
del cavo DP (22). Collegare il connettore di circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) al
linea del segnale DP (25) al connettore (26) connettore (30) sull’MFP.
della scheda ISC PWB.

16.将 DP 信号线(23)和 CIS 数据线(24)穿过 仅限 DP-771 安装 DP 中继板


DP 电缆连接盖板(22)的孔。把 DP 信号线的 17.拆下 2 颗螺丝(27)。卸下金属板(28)。 18.将 DP 中继板(M)上的接插件(29)连接至
接插件(25)和 ISC 电路板的接插件(26)相 MFP 上的接插件(30)。
连接。

16.DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 과 CIS 데이터 DP-771 만 DP 중계기판의 부착


라인 케이블 (24) 을 DP 케이블 연결 커버 17.나사 (27) 2 개를 제거합니다 . 브래킷 (28) 18.DP 중계기판 (M) 의 커넥터 (29) 를 MFP 의
(22) 의 구멍에 통과시킵니다 . DP 시그널 라 을 제거합니다 . 커넥터 (30) 에 연결합니다 .
인 커넥터 (25) 를 ISC PWB 의 커넥터 (26)
에 연결합니다 .

16.DP ケーブル接続カバー(22) の穴に DP 信号 DP-771 のみ DP 中継基板の取り付け


線 (23) と CIS データ線
(24)
を通す。
DP 信号 17.ビス (27)2 本を外す。板金 (28) を外す。 18.DP 中継基板 (M) のコネクター(29) を、
MFP
線コネクター(25) を ISC 基板のコネクター のコネクター(30) に接続する。
(26) に接続する。

9
27 N(M3x8)

24

31

M
28

M
M

DP-771 only DP-772 only 20.Plug the CIS data line (24) into the connetor
19.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with 19.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with (31) on the DP relay PWB (M).
the bracket (28) and the two screws (27) the two M3 × 8 screws (N) supplied with the
removed in step 17. DP-772.

DP-771 uniquement DP-772 uniquement 20.Enficher le câble de la ligne des données du


19.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec le 19.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec les CIS (24) dans le connecteur (31) de la carte
support (28) et les deux vis (27) retirés à deux vis M3 × 8 (N) fournies avec le DP- de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M).
l'étape 17. 772.

DP-771 solamente DP-772 solamente 20.Enchufe la línea de datos CIS (24) al conec-
19.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fíjelo con la 19.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fíjelo con los dos tor (31) PWB del relé del DP (M).
abrazadera (28) y los dos tornillos (27) que tornillos M3 × 8 (N) suministrados con DP-
quitó en el paso 17. 772.

nur DP-771 nur DP-772 20.Die CIS-Datenleitung (24) an den


19.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine 19.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine Stecker(31) auf der DP-Relaisleiterplatte (M)
(M). Befestigen Sie die Klammer (28) und (M). Befestigen Sie es mit den beiden M3 × anschließen.
die beiden Schrauben (27), die in Schritt 17 8 Schrauben (N), die sich im Lieferumfang
entfernt wurden. des DP-772 befinden.

Solo DP-771 Solo DP-772 20.Inserire la linea dati CIS (24) nel connet-
19.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fis- 19.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fis- tore(31) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di
sarla con la staffa (28) e le due viti (27) sarla con le due viti M3 × 8 (N) fornite con comunicazione DP (M).
rimosse al punto 17. l'alimentatore DP-772.

仅限 DP-771 仅限 DP-772 20.将 CIS 数据线 (24) 连接到 DP 中继电路板


19.固定 DP 中继板(M)。使用在步骤 17 中取下的 19.固定 DP 中继板(M)。使用 DP-772 附带的 2 颗 (M) 上的接插件 (31) 上。
金属板(28)和 2 颗螺丝(27)来固定。 M3X8(N) 螺丝来固定。

DP-771 만 DP-772 만 20.DP 중계기판 (M) 상의 커넥터 (31) 에 CIS


19.DP 중계 PWB (M) 를 고정합니다 . 단계 17 19.DP 중계 PWB (M) 를 고정합니다 . DP-772 데이터 라인 (24) 을 연결합니다 .
에서 분리한 브래킷 (28) 과 나사 (27) 2 개로 와 함께 공급된 나사 M3×8(N) 2 개를 사용
고정합니다 . 하여 고정합니다 .

DP-771 のみ DP-772 のみ 20.DP 中継基板 (M) 上のコネクター(31) に CIS


19.DP 中継基板 (M) を固定する。手順 17 で外 19.DP 中継基板 (M) を固定する。DP-772 に同 データ線 (24) を接続する。
した板金 (28) とビス (27)2 本で固定する。 梱のビス M3×8(N)2 本で固定する。

10
E-2

22
E-1
23

24
21

22

21.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) along the groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1).Pass the CIS 22.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP
data line cable (24) along the other groove.Install the DP cable cover 2 (E-2). cable connection cover (22) and install the
DP cable connection cover (22) using the
NOTICE screw (21) removed in step 14.
To avoid image problems that may be caused when the both of the DP signal line cable (23) and 23.Install the DP relay PWB cover (20) usingthe
CIS data line cable (24) were passed through in a same groove, be sure to slip the individual line four screws(19) removed in step 13.
in a separate groove as shown in the figure.

21.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (23) dans la rainure du couvercle 1 du câble DP (E- 22.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) sur le
1).Passez le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) dans l'autre rainure.Installez le couvercle 2 du couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP
câble DP (E-2). (22) et installer le couvercle de la connexion
REMARQUE du câble du DP (22) à l'aide de la vis (21)
déposée à l'étape 14.
Pour éviter les problèmes d'image pouvant être causés lorsque le câble de ligne de signal DP
23.Installez le couvercle du circuit imprimé du
(23) et le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) ont été passé dans une même rainure, assurez- relais du DP (20) à l'aide des quatre vis (19)
vous de glisser chaque ligne dans une rainure à part comme indiqué sur la figure. retirées à l'étape 13.
21.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP (23) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de cables 1 22. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la
del DP (E-1).Pase el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la otra ranura.Instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (22) e
cubierta de cables 2 del DP (E-2). instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del
AVISO DP (22) usando el tornillo (21) quitado en el
Para evitar posibles problemas de imagen como consecuencia de pasar tanto el cable de línea paso 14.
de señales del DP (23) como el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la misma 23.Instale la cubierta de PWB del relé del DP
ranura, asegúrese de pasar cada una de las líneas por una ranura distinta como se muestra en la (20) con los cuatro tornillos (19) que quitó en
imagen. el paso 13.

21.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1) des DP. 22.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeck-
Verlegen Sie die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die andere Nut.Befestigen Sie die Steckerab- ung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbrin-
deckung 2 (E-2) des DP. gen und die Abdeckung (22) des DP-
ANMERKUNG Kabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 14
Um Probleme mit der Bildqualität zu vermeiden, die entstehen können, wenn die Signalleitung entfernten Schraube (21) befestigen.
(23) des DP und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die gleiche Nut geführt werden, stellen Sie 23.Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DP-
sicher, dass jede Leitung in einer getrennten Nut geführt wird, wie in dem Bild gezeigt. Verbindungsplatine wieder an. Benutzen Sie
die Schraube (19) aus Schritt 13.
21. Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del cavo DP 1 (E- 22. .Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al coper-
1).Far passare il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) lungo l'altra scanalatura.Installare il coperchio del cavo chio di connessione del cavo DP (22), e quindi
DP 2 (E-2). installare il coperchio di connessione del cavo
AVVISO DP (22) utilizzando la vite (21) rimossa nel
Per evitare i problemi di immagine che si verificano quando il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) e il passo 14.
cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) vengono fatti passare nella stessa scanalatura, ricordarsi di far pas- 23. IInstallare il coperchio della scheda a circuiti
stampati di comunicazione DP (20) utilizzando
sare questi due cavi in scanalature separate come indicato in figura.
le quattro viti (19) rimosse al punto 13.
21.将 DP 信号线(23)穿过 DP 电缆盖板 1(E-1) 的槽,再把 CIS 数据线(24)穿过别的槽。安装 DP 电缆 22.将 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 安装到 DP 电缆连接盖板
盖板 2(E-2)。 (22) 上,使用步骤 14 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝
(21) 来安装 DP 电缆连接盖板 (22)。
注意 23.使用在步骤 13 取下的 4 颗螺丝 (19) 来安装
如将 DP 信号线(23)和 CIS 数据线(24)穿过同一个槽,可能会出现图像异常,因此必须如图所示
DP 中继板的盖板 (20)。
分别穿过左右两侧的槽。

21.DP 케이블 커버 1(E-1) 의 홈을 따라 DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 을 통과시킵니다 . 다른 홈을 22.DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 연결 커버
따라 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (24) 을 통과시킵니다 .DP 케이블 커버 2(E-2) 를 설치합니다 . (22) 에 부착하고 스텝 14 에서 제거한 나사
(21) 1 개로 DP 케이블 연결 커버 (22) 를 부
주의 착합니다 .
DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 과 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (24) 을 같은 홈에 통과시키는 경우 화상 23.13 단계에서 분리한 나사 (19) 4 개를 사용하
문제가 발생할 수 있으므로 그림과 같이 반드시 선을 따로 넣도록 하십시오 . 여 DP 중계기판 커버 (20) 를 설치합니다 .

21.DP ケーブルカバー1(E-1) の溝に DP 信号線 (23) を通す。別の溝に CIS データ線(24)を通す。DP 22.DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続カ
ケーブルカバー2(E-2) を取り付ける。 バー(22) に取り付ける。 手順 14 で外したビ
注意 ス (21)1 本で DP ケーブル接続カバー(22)
DP 信号線(23)
と CIS データ線(24)
を同じ溝に通すと異常画像が発生する可能性があるため、 図 を取り付ける。
の様に左右の溝に別々に入れること。 23.手順 13 で外したビス (19)4 本で、DP 中継基
板カバー(20) を取り付ける。

11
33

YS2

32
O

Steps for expanding the memory DIMM 25.Insert the memory DIMM (O) into the memory slot (YS2) of the main PWB.
(1GB)(35, 45 and 55 ppm monochrome (Insert all the way until it clicks)
machines only) (DP-771 only) 26.Replace the upper rear cover (33) of the MFP using the 8 screws (32).
24.Remove the 8 screws (32) and remove the
upper rear cover (33) of the MFP.

Opérations pour l'expansion de la mémoire 25.Insérer la mémoire DIMM (O) dans la fente mémoire (YS2) de la carte de CI principale.
DIMM (1GB) (machines monochromes 35, 45 (Insérer à fond jusqu'au clic)
et 55 ppm uniquement)(DP-771 uniquement) 26.Reposer le couvercle arrière supérieur (33) sur le MFP à l'aide des 8 vis (32).
24.Déposer les 8 vis (32) et déposer le couver-
cle arrière supérieur (33) du MFP.

Pasos para ampliar la memoria DIMM (1GB) 25.Inserte la memoria DIMM (O) en la ranura para memoria (YS2) en el PWB principal.
(máquinas monocromáticas de 35, 45 y 55 (Insértela hasta escuchar un clic)
ppm solamente) (DP-771 solamente) 26.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior (33) del MFP usando los 8 tornillos (32).
24.Quite los 8 tornillos (32) y quite la cubierta
trasera superior (33) del MFP.

Schritte zur Aufrüstung der DIMM-Speicher- 25.Setzen Sie das DIMM-Speichermodul (O) in die Speicherbank (YS2) der Hauptleiterplatte ein.
module (1GB) (nur 35, 45 und 55 ppm Mono- (Drücken Sie sie bis zum Einrasten ein.)
chrommaschinen) (nur DP-771) 26.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (33) des MFP wieder mit den 8 Schrauben (32) anbringen.
24.Die 8 Schrauben (32) entfernen und die
obere hintere Abdeckung (33) des MFP
abnehmen.

Passi per l'espansione della memoria DIMM 25.Inserire la memoria DIMM (O) nello slot della memoria (YS2) sulla scheda principale PWB.
(1GB) (solo per le macchine monocro- (Inserire completamente finché non scatta in posizione con un clic)
matiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm) (solo DP-771) 26.Ricollocare il coperchio superiore posteriore (33) dell'MFP utilizzando le 8 viti (32).
24.Rimuovere le 8 viti (32) e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio superiore posteriore (33)
dell'MFP.

内存卡 (1GB) 的增加步骤(仅对于 35 张、45 张和 25.把内存卡(O)插入主板的内存插槽(YS2)。


55 张的黑白机) (仅限 DP-771) (插到底部,直到发出咔嗒声为止)
24.拆除 8 颗螺丝 (32),拆下 MFP 的后上方盖板 26.使用 8 颗螺丝 (32) 按原样安装 MFP 的后上方盖板 (33)。
(33)。

메모리 DIMM (1GB) 의 증설순서 (흑백기 35 25.주 회로기판의 메모리 슬롯 (YS2) 에 메모리 DIMM(O) 을 삽입합니다 .
매 , 45 매 , 55 매만)(DP-771 만) (딸깍하고 소리가 날 때까지 삽입할 것 .)
24.나사 (32) 8 개를 제거하고 MFP 의 후면 상 26.나사 (32) 8 개로 MFP 후면 상단 커버 (33) 를 원래대로 부착합니다 .
단커버 (33) 를 떼어 냅니다 .

メモリーDIMM(1GB) の増設手順 (モノクロ機の 25.主回路基板のメモリースロット (YS2) にメモリーDIMM(O) を挿入する。


35 枚機、45 枚機、55 枚機のみ) (DP-771 のみ) (カチッと音がするまで挿入すること)
24.ビス (32)8 本を外し、MFP の後上カバー(33) 26.ビス (32)8 本で、MFP の後上カバー(33) を元通り取り付ける。
を取り外す。

12
A

34

Fasten the original mat.


27.Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (34) upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat (B) corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel.
28.Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro.

Fixer la plaque d’original.


27.Placer la plaque d’original (B) sur la vitre d’exposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (34) vers le haut.
Aligner le coin du plateau d'original (B) faisant un angle de 90 degrés avec le coin gauche interne du panneau d'instructions d'original.
28.Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque d’original (B) à l’aide des bandes Velcro.

Fije la alfombrilla para originales.


27.Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (34) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto.
Alinee la esquina que tiene un ángulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales (B) con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de
instrucciones para el original.
28.Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro.

Befestigen der Originalmatte.


27.Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (34) nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen.
Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), die einen 90-Grad-Winkel aufweist, mit der linken, inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten.
28.Den DP (A) schließen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen.

Fissaggio del tappetino originale.


27.Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (34) rivolto verso l’alto sul vetro di appoggio.
Allineare l’angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale (B) con l’angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale.
28.Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro.

粘贴原稿垫。
27.将原稿垫(B)放置在稿台玻璃上,并使魔术贴(34)向上。
将原稿垫(B)的 90 度角对准原稿指示板的内部左角。
28.关闭 DP(A),使原稿垫(B)粘贴到 DP 上。

원고매트 부착
27.벨크로 (34) 를 위로 향하게 하고 원고매트 (B) 를 원고대 유리판에 놓습니다 .
원고매트 (B) 는 90° 가 되어 있는 각을 원고 안내판의 좌측 안에 맞출 것 .
28.DP(A) 를 내리고 원고매트 (B) 를 DP(A) 에 부착합니다 .

原稿マットの貼り付け
27.マジックテープ (34) を上に向けて、 原稿マット (B) をコンタクトガラス上に置く。
原稿マット (B) は 90° になっている角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること。
28.DP(A) を下ろし、原稿マット (B) を DP(A) に貼り付ける。

13
I

H
J(M3x8)

Installing the hinge cover (DP-771/772 only) 30.Install the right hinge cover (I) using the M3
For the DP-770(B), proceed to step 31 on page × 8 screw BLACK (J).
15.
29.Install the left hinge cover (H).

Installation des couvercles de charnière 30.Installer le couvercle de la charnière droite


(DP-771/772 uniquement) (l) à l'aide de la vis M3 × 8 NOIRE (J).
Pour le DP-770(B), passer à l'étape 31 de la
page 15.
29.Installer le couvercle de la charnière gauche
(H).

Instalación de la cubierta de las bisagras 30.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra derecha (I)


(DP-771/772 solamente) usando el tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO (J).
Para el DP-770(B), vaya al paso 31 de la página
15.
29.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda
(H).

Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung 30.Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung (I) mit der


(nur DP-771/772) M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ (J) anbringen.
Beim DP-770(B) gehen Sie zum Schritt 31 auf
Seite 15 weiter.
29.Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) anbrin-
gen.

Installazione del coperchio cerniera 30.Installare il coperchio cerniera destra (I) uti-
(solo DP-771/772) lizzando la vite M3 × 8 NERA (J).
Per DP-770(B), procedere con il punto 31 a
pagina 15.
29.Installare il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H).

安装铰链盖板(仅限 DP-771/772) 30.使用 1 颗 M3×8 螺丝 BLACK(J) 来安装右部铰


DP-770(B) 跳至 P15 的步骤 31。 链盖板 (I)。
29.安装左部铰链盖板 (H)。

힌지커버 부착(DP-771/772 만) 30.나사 M3×8BLACK(J) 1 개로 우측 힌지커버


DP-770(B) 은 P15 의 순서 31 으로 진행 . (I) 를 부착합니다 .
29.좌측 힌지커버 (H) 를 부착합니다 .

ヒンジカバーの取り付け (DP-771/772 のみ) 30.ビス M3×8BLACK(J)1 本で右ヒンジカバー


DP-770(B) は、
P15 の手順 31 に進む。 (I) を取り付ける。
29.左ヒンジカバー(H) を取り付ける。

14
(a)
(b) K
L

Adhere the label 32.Adhere Label “Operation procedure” (K) of 33.Adhere Caution label “Original face up!” (L)
31.Clean the label on the original table with which the language corresponding to the of which the language corresponding to the
alcohol. destination of the MFP onto the existing destination of the MFP onto the label on the
label on the original table. Figure (a) original table. Figure (b)

Coller l’étiquette relative 32.Coller l'étiquette “Processus opératoire” (K) 33.Coller l'étiquette de mise en garde “Original
31.Avec de l'alcool, nettoyer létiquette se trou- dans la langue correspondant au destina- en haut!” (L) dans la langue correspondant
vant sur le plateau d'original. taire du MFP sur l'étiquette existante sur le au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette du
plateau d'original du DP. Figure (a) plateau d'original. Figure (b)

Pegue la etiqueta 32.Adhiera la etiqueta “Procedimiento opera- 33.Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “¡La cara
31.Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta tivo” (K) del idioma correspondiente al des- del original hacia arriba!” (L), del idioma que
de originales. tino del MFP sobre la etiqueta que se corresponde al destino del MFP, sobre la eti-
encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales. queta en la cubierta de originales. Figura (b)
Figura (a)

Anbringen des Schildes 32.Das Schild „Funktionsanweisung“ (K) in der 33.Das Warnschild „Originalschriftseite nach
31.Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des oben!“ (L) in der Sprache des jeweiligen
Alkohol reinigen. MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene
Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (a) Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkle-
ben. Abbildung (b)

Applicazione dell’etichetta 32.Far aderire l’etichetta “Procedure di funzion- 33.Far aderire l’etichetta di avvertenza “Origi-
31.Pulire con alcool l’etichetta sul piano origi- amento” (K) corrispondente alla lingua di nale rivolto verso l’alto!” (L) corrispondente
nale. destinazione dell’MFP, sull’etichetta esis- alla lingua di destinazione dell’MFP,
tente sul piano originale. Figura (a) sull’etichetta del piano originale. Figura (b)

粘贴标签 32.不需要本步骤。 33.不需要本步骤。


31.不需要本步骤。

라벨 부착 32.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 . 33.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .


31.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .

ラベルの貼り付け 32.この作業は不要。 33.この作業は不要。


31.この作業は不要。

15
20mm 20mm

c
20mm

20mm

[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.

[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.

[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.

[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.

[Verifica del funzionamento]


1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.

[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作,准备一张 A3 原稿(a),距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线(b)并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线(c)。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿(a)并进行测试复印,确认机器动作和复印样本。

[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .

[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。

16
20mm 20mm

c
20mm

20mm

4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.

4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.

4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP

4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.

4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.

4.对比复印样本和原稿(a),如果偏移值在标准值以上时,对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
(注意)如果图像出现底灰,用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置,则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整

4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
(주의) 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .

4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。


MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
(注意)画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。

17
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 20. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 23. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 26.

Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 20. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 23. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 26.

Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.


Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 20. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 23. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 26.

Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 20. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 23. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 26.

Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 20. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 23. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 26.

必须按照以下步骤进行调整,否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度 第 20 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度 第 23 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时,可以同时自动进行等倍值,前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 第 26 页

반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .


・선단경사확인 20 페이지 <기준치>단면:±3.0mm 이내 , 양면:±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 23 페이지 <기준치>단면:±3.0mm 이내 , 양면:±4.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 , 등배도 , 선단타이밍 , 센터 라인의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고를 사용한 자동조정은 26 페이지 참조

必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、 正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 20 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 23 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 26 ページ

18
For checking the magnification, see page29. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 31. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 33. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm

Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 29. <Valeur de référence> ±1,5% max.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 31. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 33. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.

Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 29. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±1,5 %
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 31. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 33. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm

Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 29. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 31. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 33. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm

Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 29. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±1,5%
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 31. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 33. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm

・确认等倍值 第 29 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内


・确认前端定时调整 第 31 页 < 标准值 > ±2.5mm 以内
・确认中心线 第 33 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±2.0mm 以内,
双面 :±3.0mm 以内

・등배도 확인 29 페이지 <기준치> ±1.5% 이내


・선단 타이밍 확인 31 페이지 <기준치> ±2.5mm 이내
・센터 라인확인 33 페이지 <기준치> 단면:±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면:±3.0mm 이내

・等倍度確認 29 ページ <基準値> ±1.5% 以内


・先端タイミング確認 31 ページ <基準値> ±2.5mm 以内
・センターライン確認 33 ページ <基準値>片面:±2.0mm 以内、
両面:±3.0mm 以内

19
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.

[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]


1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.

[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]


1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.

[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]


1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.

[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]


1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.

[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内。
     双面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内。

[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±4.0mm 이내

[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
<基準値>片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
     両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±4.0mm 以内

20
C (C*)

G
G

C (C*)
C

2. DP-770(B): Remove the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C).
DP-771/772: Remove the left hinge cover (H) and the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C)(C*)
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.

2. DP-770(B): Déposer la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixations gauche et droite (C).
DP-771/772: Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (H) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixa-
tions gauche et droite (C)(C*).
3. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP.
Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1,0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.

2. DP-770(B): quite el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho (C).
DP-771/772: quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (H) y el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y
derecho (C)(C*).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1,0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.

2. DP-770(B): Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) lösen.
DP-771/772: Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigung-
shalterungen (C)(C*) lösen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1,0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.

2. DP-770(B): Rimuovere l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sugli accessori di fissaggio (C) destro e sinistro.
DP-771/772: Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori
di fissaggio (C)(C*) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno.
Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entità modifica per scala: circa 1,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.

2.DP-770(B) 时 :拆下角度限制工具 (D)。拧松左右固定工具 (C) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。


DP-771/772 时 :拆下左部铰链盖板 (H) 以及角度限制工具 (D)。拧松左右固定工具 (C)(C*) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。
3.旋转右部铰链的后部的调整螺钉(3)以调整 DP 位置。
对于复印样本 (d) :逆时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到内侧。 
对于复印样本 (e) :顺时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到正面。
按比例尺的更改量 :约 1.0mm
4.进行测试复印。
2.DP-770(B) 의 경우:각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C) 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
DP-771/772 의 경우:좌 힌지커버 (H) 및 각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C)(C*) 의 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
3.우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 의 위치를 조정합니다 .
샘플 카피 (d) 의 경우:조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 를 안으로 넣습니다 .
샘플 카피 (e) 의 경우 : 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 를 앞으로 뺍니다 .
1 개 변화량:약 1.0mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
2.DP-770(B) の場合:角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (C) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める
DP-771/772 の場合:左ヒンジカバー(H) および角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (C)(C*) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める。
3.右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、DP の位置を調整する。
コピーサンプル (d) の場合:調整ビスを左に回し、 DP を奥へ動かす。
コピーサンプル (e) の場合:調整ビスを右に回し、 DP を手前へ動かす。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量:約 1.0mm
4.テストコピーを行う。

21
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14TP screws (G) that have been loosened in step 2.
7.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see steps 27 and 28 on page 13).

5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
6.Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis TP M4 × 14 (G) desserrées à l’étape 2.
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 27 et 28 à la page 13.)

5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 27 y 28 en la página 13).

5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7.Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 27 und 28 auf Seite 13).

5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
<Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14TP (G) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 27 e 28 a pagina 13).

5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内
     双面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内
6.调整完成后,重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)。
7.拆下原稿垫(B),参照第 13 页的步骤 27 和 28 再次装上。

5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .


<기준치>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
     양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±4.0mm 이내
6.조정 완료 후 스텝 2 에서 느슨하게 한 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개를 조입니다 .
7.원고매트 (B) 를 제거하고 13 페이지 순서 27, 28 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .

5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。


<基準値>片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
     両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±4.0mm 以内
6.調整終了後、手順 2 で緩めたビス M4×14TP(G)2 本を締め付ける。
7.原稿マット (B) を取り外し、
13 ページの手順 27、28 を参考に再度取り付ける。

22
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm

a f 2 g

[Checking the angle of trailing edge]


1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm

[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]


1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
Copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.

[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]


1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm

[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]


1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm

[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]


1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm

[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值。如果超过标准值时,必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
     双面时 :±4.0mm 以内

[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우:±3.0m 이내
양면의 경우:±4.0mm 이내

[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
     両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内

23
3
5
A

10
7
4

2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 4.Adjust the height of DP. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw Loosen the nut (8). mm (10)
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting Retighten the nut (8).
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear screw (9). 5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
cover (7). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting 6.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see
screw (9). steps 27 and 28 on page 13).

2.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (3) du DP (A) 4.Réglez la hauteur du DP. Quantité de changement par pas: Environ
3.Déposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis Desserrez l’écrou (8). 0,5 mm (10)
déposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrière Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis Resserrez l’écrou (8).
(7). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (7) de réglage (9). 5. Reposer le couvercle arrière (7) déposé à l'étape 3.
du DP (A). Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de 6. Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en
réglage (9). place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 27 et 28 à la
page 13).

2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 4.Ajuste la altura del DP. Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y Afloje la tuerca (8). Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo 5.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada
Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP de ajuste (9). en el paso 3.
(A). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el 6.Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva
tornillo de ajuste (9). a colocar (vea los pasos 27 y 28 en la
página 13).

2.Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) öffnen. 4.Die Höhe des DP einstellen. Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5
3.Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube Lösen Sie die Mutter (8). mm (10)
(5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Ein- Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest.
hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann stellschraube (9). 5.Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung
die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A) Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (7) wieder anbringen.
abnehmen. (9) festziehen. 6.Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder
anbringen (siehe Schritte 27und 28 auf Seite 13).

2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 4.Regolazione dell’altezza del DP Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (10)
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e Allentare il dado (8). Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coper- Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite 5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
chio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il di regolazione (9). rimosso nel passo 3.
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite 6.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo
di regolazione (9). (vedere i passi 27 e 28 a pagina 13).

2.打开 DP(A)的上盖板(3)。 4.调整 DP 的高度。 每 1 格的移动量 :约 0.5mm(10)


3.拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (4) 和 1 颗螺丝 (5),将塑 松驰螺母(8)。 将螺母(8)按原样紧固好。
料片 (6) 从后盖板 (7) 上拆除,拆下 DP 主机 复印样张(f)时 :松弛调整螺丝(9)。 5.重新安装在步骤 3 中拆下的后盖板(7)。
(A) 的后盖板 (7)。 复印样张(g)时 :紧固调整螺丝(9)。 6.拆下原稿垫(B),参照第 13 页的步骤 27 和
28 再次装上。

2.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (3) 를 엽니다 . 4.DP 의 높이를 조정합니다 . 1 개 변화량:약 0.5mm(10)


3.TP 나사 (4) 3 개와 나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 너트 (8) 를 느슨하게 합니다 . 너트 (8) 를 원래대로 조입니다 .
스트랩 (6) 을 뒷면 커버 (7) 에서 제거해 샘플 카피 (f) 의 경우:조정나사 (9) 를 느슨 5.순서 3 에서 제거한 뒷 커버 (7) 를 원래대로
DP(A) 의후면 커버 (7) 를 제거합니다 . 하게 합니다 . 장착합니다 .
샘플 카피 (g) 의 경우:조정나사 (9) 를 조입 6.원고매트 (B) 를 제거하고 13 페이지 순서
니다 . 27, 28 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .

2.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(3) を開く。 4.DP の高さを調整する。 1 目盛り当たりの変化量:約 0.5mm(10)


3.TP ビス (4)3 本とビス (5)1 本を外し、スト ナット (8) をゆるめる。 ナット (8) を元通り締める。
ラップ (6) を後カバー(7) から外して、 コピーサンプル (f) の場合:調整ビス (9) を 5.手順 3 で取り外した後カバー(7) を元通り
DP(A) の後カバー(7) を取り外す。 ゆるめる。 取り付ける。
コピーサンプル (g) の場合:調整ビス (9) を 6.原稿マット (B) を取り外し、13 ページの手
締める。 順 27、28 を参考に再度取り付ける。

24
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm

a f 2 g

7.Make a proof copy again.


8.Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm

7.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.


8.Répétez les étapes 1 à 6 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
Copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.

7.Haga otra copia de prueba.


8.Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm

7.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.


8.Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm

7.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.


8.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm

7.再次进行测试复印。
8.反复操作步骤 1~6,直至 复印样张的线(2)为标准值内。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
     双面时 :±4.0mm 以内

7.다시 테스트 카피를 합니다 .


8.샘플 카피 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ~ 6 을 반복합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우:±3.0m 이내
양면의 경우:±4.0mm 이내

7.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
8.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ~ 6 を繰り返す。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
     両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内

25
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
If there is no DP auto adjustment original. out rear-side adjustment.(DP-771/772 only)
1.Set the maintenance mode U411, select [DP Auto Adj] and press the 5.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
Start key to print an original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until OK appears.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out For details, see the service manual.
surface adjustment.

[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP procéder au réglage du côté arrière.(DP-771/772 uniquement)
1. Régler le mode maintenance U411, sélectionner [DP Auto Adj] et appuyer sur la 5. Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
touche Start pour imprimer un original. ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message OK
touche Start. apparaisse.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage de la surface.

[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP ajuste de reverso.(DP-771/772 solamente)
1. Entre al modo de mantenimiento U441, seleccione [DP Auto Adj] y pulse la tecla 5.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
de Start para imprimir un original. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 4 hasta que aparezca OK en
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un la pantalla.
ajuste de anverso. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.

[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist gen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen. (nur DP-771/772 )
1. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP Auto Adj] wählen und die Start-Taste 5. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
betätigen, um ein Original auszudrucken. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betäti- Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
gen. bis OK angezeigt wird.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
gen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.

[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore. ( Solo DP-771/772 )
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, selezionare [DP Auto Adj] e premere 5. Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
il tasto di Start per stampare un originale. (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazi-
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. one dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per fino a quando appare OK.
eseguire la regolazione della superficie. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.

[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 4.将原稿面朝下放在 DP 主机上,按 Start 键以进行反面的调整。( 仅限


没有 DP 调整用原稿时 DP-771/772)
1.设置维护模式 U411,按 [DP Auto Adj]、Start 键以输出原稿。 5.如果屏幕上出现 OK(完成),则表示调整完成。
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上,按 Start 键。 如果出现 ERROR XX(错误 XX),则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上,按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。 重复步骤 2 和 4,直到 OK(完成)出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。

[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 4.원고를 FaceDown 으로 DP 에 장착하고 시작키를 눌러 뒷면조정을 합


DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 니다 . (DP-771/772 만 )
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP Auto Adj], 시작키를 눌러 원고를 5.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
출력합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ~ 4 를 반복합니다 .
3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 로 세트하고 시작키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조

[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 4.原稿を FaceDown で DP へセットし、Start キーを押し、裏面の調整を行


DP 調整用原稿が無い場合 う。(DP-771/772 のみ )
1.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP Auto Adj]、Start キーを押 5.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。
し原稿を出力する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、Start キーを押す。 認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 2 ~ 4 を繰り返す。
3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、
Start キーを押し、表面の調整を行 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
う。

26
5mm

F 149 1mm

A(149 5mm)

R 74 1mm

Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until OK appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FaceUp (Chart2)], For details, see the service manual.
[Input] and the Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.

Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message OK apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au
réglage de la surface.

Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca OK en
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP la pantalla.
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
el ajuste de anverso.

Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis OK angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP Faceup (Chart2)], [Input] Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberfläche-
neinstellung ausführen zu lassen.

Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare OK.
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
della superficie.

使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 3.如果屏幕上出现 OK(完成),则表示调整完成。


1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上,并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设 如果出现 ERROR XX(错误 XX),则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
定原稿。 重复步骤 1 和 2,直到 OK(完成)出现。
2.设置维护模式 U411,按顺序按 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)]、[Input]、Start 详细内容请参照维修手册。
键以进行正面的调整。

DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 3.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .


1.DP 자동 조정 원고를 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이라고 표시된 곳 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
에서 부터 원고를 셋팅합니다 . 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ~ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)], [Input], 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
시작키의 순서로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .

DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 3.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。


1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
セットする。 認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 1 ~ 2 を繰り返す
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)]、[Input]、 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
Start キーの順に押し、表面の調整を行う。

27
5mm

F 149 1mm

A(149 5mm)

R 74 1mm

4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto 6.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.(DP-771/
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side 772 only)
where the F and R are marked into the DP first.(DP-771/772 only) If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FaceDown (Chart2)], position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until OK appears.
[Normal Target], [Input] and the Start key in that order to carry out rear- For details, see the service manual.
side adjustment.(DP-771/772 only)

4. Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R 6.Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé. ( DP-
(arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le 771/772 uniquement)
bas et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué.
lequel F et R sont indiqués.( DP-771/772 uniquement) Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5
5.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP
jusqu'à ce que le message OK apparaisse.
FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] et Start dans cet ordre
Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage du côté arrière.( DP-771/772 uniquement)

4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste 6.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido real-
automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el izado.(DP-771/772 solamente )
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R.(DP-771/ Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
772 solamente ) ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca OK en
5.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP Face- la pantalla.
Down (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] y la tecla de Start, en ese Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
orden, para realizar el ajuste de reverso.(DP-771/772 solamente )

4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa- 6.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das sen.(nur DP-771/772)
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung
DP eingeführt wird.(nur DP-771/772) fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wieder-
5.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FaceDown (Chart2)], holen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis OK angezeigt wird.
[Normal Target], [Input] und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
betätigen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.(nur DP-
771/772)
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R 6.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.( Solo DP-771/
dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale 772 )
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R.( Solo Se compare ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita.
DP-771/772 ) Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le opera-
5.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP zioni 4 e 5 fino a quando appare OK.
FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] e il tasto di Start, per Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.( Solo DP-771/772 )

4.完成正面调整后,将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向下,并首先将标有 F 和 6.如果屏幕上出现 OK(完成),则表示调整完成。( 仅限 DP-771/772)


R 的一侧插入 DP 来设定原稿。( 仅限 DP-771/772) 如果出现 ERROR XX(错误 XX),则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
5.设置维护模式 U411,按顺序按 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)]、[Normal 重复步骤 4 和 5,直到 OK(完成)出现。
Taget]、[Input]、Start 键以进行反面的调整。( 仅限 DP-771/772) 详细内容请参照维修手册。

4.표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R 6.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 . (DP-771/772 만 )
이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 로 세트합니다 . (DP-771/772 만 ) ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
5.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)], 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ~ 5 를 반복합니다 .
[Normal Taget], [Input], 시작키 순서로 뒷면조정을 합니다 . (DP- 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
771/772 만 )

4.表面の調整完了後、 DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を下に向け、 F、R が書かれて 6.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。 (DP-771/772 のみ


いる方から DP へセットする。 (DP-771/772 のみ ) )
5.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)]、 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
[Normal Taget]、[Input]、Start キーの順に押し、 裏面の調整を行う。 認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 4 ~ 5 を繰り返す。
(DP-771/772 のみ ) 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。

28
X X'
X' X

3 3

X' X
X 2 X' 2
1

a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X

[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
according to the following procedure. (DP-770(B))
<Reference value> Main Scan(CIS):Adjusts the scanner CIS main-scan magnification (DP-771/
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5% 772)
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5% Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification (DP-771/772)

2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.


[Vérification de l’agrandissement]
Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner(surface)
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem-
Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner (arrière)(DP-
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la
770(B))
procédure suivante.
Main Scan (CIS):Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du CIS du scanner (DP-771/
<Valeur de référence>
772)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5%
Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du CIS du scanner (DP-
Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5%
771/772)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
Sub Scan(F): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) escáner.(anverso)
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Sub Scan(B): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del escáner
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. (reverso) (DP-770(B))
<Valor de referencia> Main Scan(CIS):Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal CIS del escáner
(DP-771/772)
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5% Sub Scan (CIS): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5% escáner (DP-771/772)
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2.Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Main Scan(CIS):Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Mainscan-Vergrößerung (DP-771/772)
<Bezugswert> Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung (DP-771/772)
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento]
della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento,
Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(lato posteriore)(DP-
<Valore di riferimento>
770(B))
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della
linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% Main Scan (CIS):Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione principale CIS dello scanner (DP-771/772)
Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner (DP-771/772)

[ 确认等倍值 ] 2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。


1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)、(3)之间的偏移值。 Sub Scan(F) :读取副扫描等倍度的调整(正面)
如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Sub Scan(B) :读取副扫描等倍度的调整(反面)(DP-770(B))
< 标准值 > Main Scan(CIS) :CIS 的读取主扫描等倍度的调整 (DP-771/772)
对于副扫描方向,线(2)的上下偏移值 :±1.5% 以内 Sub Scan(CIS) :CIS 的读取副扫描等倍度的调整 (DP-771/772)
对于主扫描方向,线(3)的左右偏移值 :±1.5% 以内

[ 등배도확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .


1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F):스캔 부주사등배도의 조정(표면)
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Sub Scan(B):스캔 부주사등배도의 조정(뒷면)(DP-770(B))
<기준치> Main Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 주주사등배도의 조정 (DP-771/772)
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이:±1.5% 이내 Sub Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 부주사등배도의 조정 (DP-771/772)
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이:±1.5% 이내

[ 等倍度確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、 調整を行う。


1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F):読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面 )
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Sub Scan(B):読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 裏面 )(DP-770(B))
<基準値> Main Scan(CIS):CIS の読み取り主走査等倍度の調整 (DP-771/772)
副走査方向の場合、 線 (2) の上下ずれ:±1.5% 以内 Sub Scan(CIS):CIS の読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 (DP-771/772)
主走査方向の場合、 線 (3) の左右ずれ:±1.5% 以内

29
X X'
X' X

3 3

X' X
X 2 X' 2
1

a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X

3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.10 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%

3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,10 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%

3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,10 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%

3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,10 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%

3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento


Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,10 % Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%

3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4,直至复印样本上的线(2)、(3)之间的偏移值达


在长度偏短时 复印样本(h)(j):调高设定值 到标准值范围内。
在长度偏长时 复印样本(i)(k):调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量 :0.10% 对于副扫描方向,线(2)的上下偏移值 :±1.5% 以内
4.进行测试复印。 对于主扫描方向,线(3)的左右偏移值 :±1.5% 以内

3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ~ 4 를 반복합


길이가 짧은 경우 샘플 카피 (h)(j):설정치를 높입니다 . 니다 .
길이가 긴 경우 샘플 카피 (i)(k):설정치를 내립니다 . <기준치>
1 스텝당 변화량:0.10% 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이:±1.5% 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이:±1.5% 이내

3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ~ 4


長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j):設定値を上げる を繰り返す。
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k):設定値を下げる <基準値>
1 ステップ当たりの変化量:0.10% 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ:±1.5% 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。 主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ:±1.5% 以内

30
2.5mm
2.5mm

1 2

a l m

[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.(DP-771/772)
<Reference value> CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.(DP-771/772)
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (rear side)(DP-770(B))

[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. CIS Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête pour le balayage par le CIS.(DP-771/
772)
<Valeur de référence>
CIS Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière pour le balayage par le CIS.(DP-771/772)
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)(DP-770(B))
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. CIS Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior para exploración CIS.(DP-771/772)
<Valor de referencia> CIS Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior para exploración CIS.(DP-771/772)
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).(DP-770(B))

[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.(DP-771/772)
<Bezugswert> CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.(DP-771/772)
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)(DP-770(B))

[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scansione CIS.(DP-771/772)
<Valore di riferimento>
CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.(DP-771/772)
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteriore)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteriore)(DP-770(B))
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head :调整前端定时 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail :调整后端定时 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > CIS Head :调整 CIS 读取时的前段对位 (DP-771/772)
线(2)的上下偏移值 :±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail :调整 CIS 读取时的后端定时 (DP-771/772)
Back Head :调整前端定时 ( 反面 )(DP-770(B))
Back Tail :调整后端定时 ( 反面 )(DP-770(B))
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .
1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준 Front Head :선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail :후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
<기준치> CIS Head: CIS 스캔 시의 선단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .(DP-771/772)
선 (2) 의 상하차이:±2.5mm 이내 CIS Tail: CIS 스캔 시의 후단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .(DP-771/772)
Back Head :선단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .(DP-770(B))
Back Tail :후단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .(DP-770(B))
[ 先端タイミング確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、 調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ Front Head :先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
が基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整を行う。 Front Tail :後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
<基準値> CIS Head: CIS 読み込み時の先端タイミングを調整する (DP-771/772)
線 (2) の上下ずれ:±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail: CIS 読み込み時の後端タイミングを調整する (DP-771/772)
Back Head: 先端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する (DP-770(B))
Back Tail: 後端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する (DP-770(B))

31
2.5mm
2.5mm

1 2

a l m

3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the faster leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the slower leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.17 mm
4. Perform a test copy.

3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,17 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.

3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,17 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.

3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,17 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.

3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-


Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,17 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova

3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4,直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范


在前端定时偏快时 复印样本(l):调低设定值 围内。
在前端定时偏慢时 复印样本(m):调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量 :0.17mm 线(2)的上下偏移值 :±2.5mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。

3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ~ 4 를 반복합니다 .


선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 샘플 카피 (l):설정치를 내립니다 . <기준치>
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 샘플 카피 (m):설정치를 올립니다 . 선 (2) 의 상하차이:±2.5mm 이내
1 스텝당 변화량:0.17mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .

3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ~ 4 を繰


先端タイミングが早い場合コピーサンプル (l):設定値を下げる。 り返す。
先端タイミングが遅い場合コピーサンプル (m):設定値を上げる。 <基準値>
1 ステップ当たりの変化量:0.17mm 線 (2) の上下ずれ:±2.5mm 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。

32
2mm/3mm 2mm/3mm

1 2 2

a n o

[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure. CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line (DP-771/772)
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm

[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante. CIS: Permet de régler l'axe du CIS (DP-771/772)
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm

[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso)
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso)
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una CIS: ajusta la línea central CIS (DP-771/772)
cara: ±2,0 mm

[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie (DP-771/772)
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm

[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS (DP-771/772)
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm

[ 确认中心线 ] 2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。


1.确认原稿(a)中心线(1)和复印样本中心线(2)之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front :中心位置(正面)的调整
移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Back :中心位置(反面)的调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±2.0mm 以内 CIS:CIS 的中心位置的调整 (DP-771/772)
     双面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内

[ 센터 라인 확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .


1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 Front:센터 위치(표면)의 조정
. 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . Back:센터 위치(뒷면)의 조정
<기준치>단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이:±2.0mm 이내 CIS:CIS 의 센터 위치조정 ((DP-771/772)
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내

[ センターライン確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、 調整を行う。


1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front:センター位置(表面)の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Back:センター位置(裏面)の調整
<基準値>片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±2.0mm 以内 CIS:CIS のセンター位置の調整 (DP-771/772)
     両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内

33
2mm/3mm 2mm/3mm

1 2 2

a n o

3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Increases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm

3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
diminuer la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,085 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.

3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
aumenta el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): disminuye Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
el valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm

3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
erhöhen. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
verringern. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.

3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo


Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): aumenta il scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
valore. riferimento.
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): riduce il <Valore di riferimento>
valore. Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova

3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4,直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范


当中心向前偏移时 复印样本(n):调高设定值 围内。
当中心向内偏移时 复印样本(o):调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量 :0.085mm 单面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±2.0mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。 双面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内

3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ~ 4 를


센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n):설정치를 높입니다 . 반복합니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 내립니다 . <기준치>
1 스텝당 변화량:0.085mm 단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이:±2.0mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내

3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ~ 4 を


センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n):設定値を上げ 繰り返す。
る。 <基準値>
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を下げる。 片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±2.0mm 以内
1 ステップ当たりの変化量:0.085mm 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。

34
MEMO
MEMO
2013. 7
303NW56730-01
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
Headquarters Unit 3 & 5, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
225 Sand Road, Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA Phone: +852-2496-5678
Phone: +1-973-808-8444 Fax: +852-2610-2063
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
Latin America KYOCERA Document Solutions
8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100 (China) Corporation
Miami, Florida 33166, USA 8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Phone: +1-305-421-6640 Shanghai,200003, China
Fax: +1-305-421-6666 Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Canada (Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
Phone: +1-905-670-4425 335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,
Fax: +1-905-670-8116 Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Fax: +66-2-586-0278
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Phone: +52-555-383-2741 12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Fax: +52-555-383-7804 Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda. Fax: +65-6748-3788
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP KYOCERA Document Solutions
06543-306, Brazil Hong Kong Limited
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353
Unit 1,2,4,6,8 & 10, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304
Peak Road Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA Fax: +852-3185-1399
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile
Phone: +562-2350-7000 KYOCERA Document Solutions
Fax: +562-2350-7150 Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Australia Pty. Ltd. Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113, Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999 KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588 #3F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,
Seoul, Korea
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +822-6933-4050
New Zealand Ltd. Fax: +822-747-0084
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand KYOCERA Document Solutions
Phone: +64-9-415-4517 India Private Limited
Fax: +64-9-415-4597 Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,
Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V. KYOCERA Document Solutions
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, Deutschland GmbH
The Netherlands Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Phone: +31-20-654-0000 Germany
Fax: +31-20-653-1256 Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
The Netherlands Altmannsdorferstraße 91, Stiege 1, 2. OG, Top 1, 1120,
Phone: +31-20-5877200 Wien, Austria
Fax: +31-20-5877260 Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road, KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS, Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden
United Kingdom Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Phone: +44-118-931-1500 Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.
Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy, Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Phone: +39-02-921791 Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem, Denmark
Belgium Phone: +45-70223880
Phone: +32-2-7209270 Fax: +45-45765850
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Espace Technologique de St Aubin Portugal
Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX, Phone: +351-21-843-6780
France Fax: +351-21-849-3312
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A. South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain 90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Phone: +34-91-6318392 Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +34-91-6318219 Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.


Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,
Finland Russia
Phone: +358-9-47805200 Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +358-9-47805390 Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East


Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich, United Arab Emirates
Switzerland Phone: +971-04-433-0412
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950
KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions 2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Turkey A.S. Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
34394 Şişli İstanbul, Turkey http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Phone: +90-212-356-7000
Fax: +90-212-356-6725

© 2016 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.


is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

S-ar putea să vă placă și